• Author / Uploaded
• ArjunroyEdward

Citation preview

Technical Manual

RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR 1100 MULTIPILOT 1100 Including Installation Instructions Software Version 4.0

Display Electronics Units GE3062, RADARPILOT GE3064, CHARTRADAR and GE3065, MULTIPILOT

Item No.: ED3051G542

Revision: 02 (2005-09)

Order No.: 390001631

This document is our property for which we reserve all rights, including those relating to patents or registered designs. It must not be reproduced or used otherwise or made available to any third party without our prior permission in writing. Alterations due to technical progress are reserved.

SAM Electronics GmbH D - 22763 Hamburg Service Customer Support Center Telephone: + 49 (0) 18 03 00 85 53 Telefax: + 49 (0) 18 03 00 85 54 e-mail:[email protected]

t_eu11_eti.fm / 06.09.05

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

List of Contents

List of Contents List of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

1

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

1.1

Software Releases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

1.2

Hardware Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

1.3

General Recommendations for Installation, Maintenance and Repair Work . . . . . . . . . . 16

1.4

Safety Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

1.5

Dangerous High Frequency Radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

1.6

Safety Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

2

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

2.1

Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4

Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Operating Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

2.3

Compatibility with SAM Electronics Radar / NACOS equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

2.4

Prerequisite for the MULTIPILOT 1100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

2.5 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3

CHARTRADAR 1100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Functionalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

2.6

AIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

2.7

VDR DEBEG 4300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

3

Installation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

3.1 3.1.1 3.1.1.1 3.1.1.2 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.1.4

General Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Maximum Cable Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Cable Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Electronics Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5

Specific Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Internal Cabling / Prefabricated Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Recommendations Concerning the Ship’s Sensors / Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Recommendations Concerning the Connection of a UAIS DEBEG 3400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Recommendations Concerning the Compass Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Recommendations Concerning the Position Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

4 4.1

Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_IVZ.fm / 06.09.05

3

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 List of Contents

Technical Manual

4.2

"Power On" Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

4.3

CAN Bus Concept / Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

4.4

Termination of RS422 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

4.5 4.5.1 4.5.2 4.5.3 4.5.3.1 4.5.3.2 4.5.3.3 4.5.4 4.5.4.1 4.5.4.2 4.5.4.3 4.5.4.4 4.5.5 4.5.6 4.5.7 4.5.8 4.5.9 4.5.9.1 4.5.9.2 4.5.9.3 4.5.9.3.1 4.5.9.3.2 4.5.10 4.5.10.1 4.5.10.2 4.5.10.3 4.5.11 4.5.11.1 4.5.11.2 4.5.11.2.1 4.5.11.2.2 4.5.11.2.3 4.5.11.2.4 4.5.12 4.5.12.1 4.5.12.2 4.5.12.3 4.5.12.4 4.5.12.5 4.5.13

Display Electronics Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pentium Motherboard (PMB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware Description, Types of Motherboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Position of the Pcbs in the Motherboard’s Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connectors at the Rear of the Display Electronics Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radar Data Converter (RDC) GE3044G219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Switch of the RDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDE Memory Module (GE3062G001) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphics and Video Processor (GVP) GE3044G213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interconnection Box VS3034G030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connectors and Terminals of the Interconnection Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interconnection Board GE3044G216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-in Pcbs for the Interface Conversion with Interconnection Board GE3044G216 . . . . . . . Connection of Ship’s Sensors to GE3044G216 TB1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional Power Supply Cable (Modification Kit VS3034G035) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Interface GE3044G207 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Gyro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pulse Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIS Connection, RS422 INT Assembly SH3014G203 - RS422 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COM Expander GE3044G210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sensor Interfaces TB1...TB5 with Plug-in Adapter Pcbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-in Pcbs for the Interface Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TTL Plug-in Pcb GE3044G211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 mA Current Loop (TTY) Plug-in Pcb GE3044G212 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RS232 Plug-in Pcb GE3044G214 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RS422/RS485 Plug-in Pcb GE3044G218 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Unit BD3027 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote Keyboard Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trackball BD 3028 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radar Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trackpilot Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keyboard Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RGB Buffer GE3044G222 (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

47 47 48 49 50 50 51 53 56 57 57 58 59 60 61 62 64 64 65 66 66 67 68 72 72 73 74 75 76 76 77 77 78 79 79 80 80 81 81 83

Setting-To-Work/Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2

Modification of the Drive Module Fitting Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Diskette Drive without Hard-Disk and DVD-ROM Drive (RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR 1100) 86 Drive Module with Diskette Drive, Hard-Disk and DVD-ROM Drive (MULTIPILOT 1100) . . . 88

5.2

CHARTRADAR 1100 Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

5.3

MULTIPILOT 1100 Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2

UAIS DEBEG 3400, Setting-to-Work and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Installation and Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

4

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_IVZ.fm / 06.09.05

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

List of Contents

5.4.3

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

5.5

Configuration Parameters for the Connection of a VDR DEBEG 4300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

5.6 5.6.1 5.6.2 5.6.3

System Maintenance Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Trackball and Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Entering the System Maintenance Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Service Log-in Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

5.7

Menu Structure of the System Maintenance Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

5.8 5.8.1 5.8.2 5.8.3 5.8.4 5.8.5

Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Date & Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Map Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Map Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Track Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

5.9 5.9.1 5.9.2 5.9.3 5.9.4 5.9.5

Selfcheck Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Map Storage Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 RDC Test Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 ARPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

5.10 5.10.1 5.10.2

Telemonitoring Data Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Listing the System Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Determining the Software Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

5.11 5.11.1 5.11.2 5.11.3 5.11.4 5.11.5 5.11.6 5.11.7 5.11.7.1 5.11.7.2 5.11.7.3 5.11.8 5.11.8.1 5.11.8.2 5.11.8.3 5.11.9 5.11.10 5.11.11 5.11.12 5.11.13 5.11.14

Configure Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Defaults/Reload/Save Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Restart for the Activation of TCU Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Navigation in the Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Configuration File Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 System Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 System / Ship Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Configuration of the Indicators (Administration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Configuration of the Indicator’s Serial Interfaces (Serial Interfaces) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Configuration of the Transceivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Sensor Interfaces (Additional Interfaces via Analog Interface / COM Expander) . . . . . . . . . . 127 Gyro and Pulse Log Interfaces of the Analog Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Serial Interface of the Analog Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Serial Interfaces 1...5 of the COM Expander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 AIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 NACOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Planning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Conning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 ECDIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 VDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

5.12 5.12.1 5.12.1.1 5.12.1.2 5.12.1.3 5.12.1.4 5.12.1.5 5.12.1.6 5.12.1.7 5.12.1.8

Service Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Monitor Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 RDC Service and Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Check RDC Alarm IO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Serial I/O Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Software Update (+PCBs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 PCB Software Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 RKE Software Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 RKE Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_IVZ.fm / 06.09.05

5

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 List of Contents

Technical Manual

5.12.1.9 5.12.2 5.12.2.1 5.12.2.2 5.12.2.3 5.12.2.4 5.12.3 5.12.4

Start Program (Diskette) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting-to-Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advanced Settings (Magnetron Current, Tuning Offset, STC Compensation) . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnetron Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Antenna Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NACOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.13

Commissioning Data Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

5.14 5.14.1 5.14.2 5.14.3 5.14.4

Motherboard BIOS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering the BIOS Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation of the BIOS Setup Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of Motherboard DFI CA64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.15 5.15.1 5.15.2

Upgrade Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Analog Interface Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 RGB Buffer Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

6

145 145 145 148 149 149 150 150 153 153 153 153 154

Setting-To-Work Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

6.1

Setting-To-Work Workflow for the Radar Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.5 6.2.6 6.2.7

Example of the Configuration of a Dual Installation with a CHARTPILOT . . . . . . . . . . . System Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Layout Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure (System / Ship Parameters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure (Radar > Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure (Radar > Transceiver) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure (AIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure (Planning System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

160 160 161 162 164 172 173 173

6.3 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3

Important Hardware Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COM Expander GE3044G210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radar Data Converter (RDC) GE3044G219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Interface (AI) GE3044G207 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

174 174 175 176

7

Revision Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

8

Repair/Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

8.1

Keyboard and Buzzer for Service Purposes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 8.2.4 8.2.5 8.2.6 8.2.6.1 8.2.6.2 8.2.7 8.2.8

Trouble-Shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red Screen and Following Automatic Reset (RDC Watchdog) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Electronics Unit Does Not Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring the Start of the Processes during Booting (RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR only) The MULTIPILOT 1100 works in Radar Mode only / Emergency Backup System . . . . . . . . Manual Activation of the Emergency Backup System (Booting as a RADARPILOT 1100): . Manual Activation of the Standard System (booting as MULTIPILOT 1100): . . . . . . . . . . . . Colors, Brightness and Contrast of the Monitor are Faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trackball Operation is Erratic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.3 8.3.1 8.3.2

Software Update and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 System Software Installation/Update of a RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR 1100 . . . . . . . . . . 186 System Software Installation/Update of a MULTIPILOT 1100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

8.4

Opening the Housings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

6

181 181 181 182 182 183 183 184 184 184 185

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_IVZ.fm / 06.09.05

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

List of Contents

8.4.1 8.4.2 8.4.3 8.4.4 8.4.5 8.4.6 8.4.7

Display Electronics Unit Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Interconnection Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Console Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 SCC C4 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Desktop Housing, Monitor, Operating Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Operating Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

8.5

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

8.6 8.6.1 8.6.2 8.6.3 8.6.4 8.6.5 8.6.6 8.6.7 8.6.8 8.6.9 8.6.10 8.6.11 8.6.12 8.6.13 8.6.14 8.6.14.1 8.6.14.2

Exchange of Parts and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Exchange of the Main Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Exchange of the Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Exchange of the Memory Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Exchange of the CMOS Backup Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Exchange of Graphics and Video Processor (GVP GE3044G213) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Exchange of Ethernet Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Exchange of Radar Data Converter (RDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Exchange of the IDE Memory Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Exchange of the Analog Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Exchange of the COM Expander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Exchange of the Diskette Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Exchange of the Electronics Unit’s Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Exchange of Filter Pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Exchange of Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Exchange of the Fan of the Display Electronics Unit Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Exchange of the Processor Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

8.7

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

8.8 8.8.1 8.8.2 8.8.3

Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Spare Part Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Spare Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Spare Parts for Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

9

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

9.1

Conformity to Standards, Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

9.2 9.2.1 9.2.2 9.2.3 9.2.4 9.2.5

Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Performance Data of the Radar Data Converter (RDC) GE3044G219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Performance Data of the Graphics and Video Processor GE3044G213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Performance Data of the Analog Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Performance Data of the RGB Buffer GE3044G222 (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Performance Data of the Electronics Unit’s Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

9.3 9.3.1 9.3.1.1 9.3.1.2 9.3.2

External Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Analog Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Analog Gyro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Pulse Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 COM Expander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

9.4 9.4.1 9.4.1.1

Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Display Electronics Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Operating Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

9.5

Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

9.6

Compass Safe Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

10

System Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

10.1

System Fault Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_IVZ.fm / 06.09.05

7

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 List of Contents

Technical Manual

10.2

AIS Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

10.3

System Fault Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

11

Index of Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

12

Cabling Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

13

Outline Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Blind Sector / Blanking Sector Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

8

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_IVZ.fm / 06.09.05

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

List of Figures

List of Figures Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig.

1-1 1-2 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-13 4-16 4-17 4-18 4-19 4-20 4-21 4-22 4-23 4-24 4-25 4-26 4-27 4-28 4-29 4-31 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10

Version label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Pcb labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Display Electronics Unit with Interconnection Box, disassembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Console Operating Unit with all Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Connection of an UAIS DEBEG 3400 electronics unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Preparation of the cable endings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Cable glands with grounding inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Cable inlet consisting of a hole with brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Typical connection of ship’s sensors with serial interfaces to the RDC, single installation . . . 34 Typical connection of ship’s sensors with serial interfaces to the RDC, dual installation . . . . 35 Typical connection of ship’s sensors to the Analog Interface without redundancy . . . . . . . . . 36 Typical connection of ship’s sensors to the Analog Interface with redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Block diagram with wiring concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 "Power on" concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 CAN bus concept and termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Termination of a single talker/single listener RS422 connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Termination of a single talker / multi listener RS422 connection (via Interconnection Board) . 45 Termination of a single talker / multi listener RS422 connection (via COM Expander) . . . . . . 45 Block diagram of the Display Electronics Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Example of a motherboard (ATX) in the Display Electronics Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Interface connectors at the rear of the Display Electronics Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 RDC pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 The TVA signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 IDE memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Example for a Graphics And Video Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Connectors at the rear of the Interconnection Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Terminals on the Interconnection Board GE3044G216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Power supply cable GE3050G020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Analog Interface, ≥Rev. 03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Connection of log and gyro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 SH3014T203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 RS422 signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 COM Expander pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 TTL plug-in pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 20 mA current loop (TTY) plug-in pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 RS232 plug-in pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 RS422/RS485 plug-in pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Standard Operating Unit, integrated in desktop housing or console housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Keyboard pcbs with Keyboard Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Block diagram showing one channel (red) of the RGB Buffer as an example . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Diskette drive brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Mounting of the diskette drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Disconnection of the drive cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Dismounting of the drive module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Turning the brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Interfaces for ship’s sensor data, UAIS DEBEG 3400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Connection of the Primary Display Port UAIS DEBEG 3400 at the COM Expander . . . . . . . . 94 Connection of the Primary Display Port UAIS DEBEG 3400 at the Analog Interface . . . . . . . 94 System position (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 System Maintenance Manager window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_AVZ.fm / 06.09.05

9

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 List of Figures

Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig.

10

5-11 5-12 5-13 5-14 5-15 5-16 5-17 5-18 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-7 6-8 6-9 6-10 6-11 6-12 6-13 6-14 6-15 6-16 6-17 6-18 6-19 6-20 8-3 12-1 12-2 12-3 12-4 12-5 12-6 12-7 12-8 12-9 12-10 12-11 12-12 12-13 12-14 12-15 12-16 12-17 12-18 12-19 12-20 12-21 12-22 12-23 12-24 12-25 12-26

Technical Manual

Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System fault list (present faults) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System fault list (Fault History, System Integrity Faults) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List of software versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRACKPILOT configuration manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PMA Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Performance monitor display (drawing to illustrate the principle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System diagram of a dual installation with CHARTPILOT (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Layout settings for the example of a dual installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ship Data and Parameter settings for the example of a dual installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicator 1 configuration settings for the example of a dual installation, part 1 . . . . . . . . . . Indicator 1 configuration settings for the example of a dual installation, part 2 . . . . . . . . . . Indicator 1 configuration settings for the example of a dual installation, part 3 . . . . . . . . . . Indicator 1 configuration settings for the example of a dual installation, part 4 . . . . . . . . . . Indicator 2 configuration settings for the example of a dual installation, part 1 . . . . . . . . . . Indicator 2 configuration settings for the example of a dual installation, part 2 . . . . . . . . . . Indicator 2 configuration settings for the example of a dual installation, part 3 . . . . . . . . . . Indicator 2 configuration settings for the example of a dual installation, part 4 . . . . . . . . . . Transceiver configuration settings for the example of a dual installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIS system settings for the example of a dual installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning System settings for the example of a dual installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COM Expander pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RDC pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Interface ≥Rev. 03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection of log and gyro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminals on the Interconnection Board GE3044G216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unmounting the front frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Diagram, General Remarks, 1/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Diagram, Index, 2/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Diagram, Single Radar, 3/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Diagram, Dual Radar, 4/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Diagram, Multiple Radar, 5/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Diagram, Console Internal, 6/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Diagram, Remarks, 1/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Diagram, Index, 2/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Diagram, Display Connection, 3/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Diagram, Standard Interfaces, 4/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Diagram, optional COM Expander, 5/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Diagram, optional Analog Interface, 6/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Diagram, Transceiver up (Version A), 7/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Diagram, Transceiver down (Version B), 8/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-Band, Interconnection Transceiver Version A and B, 1/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-Band, Transceiver Version A, gearbox cabling, 1/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-Band, Transceiver Version A, gearbox cabling, combined HM and Azimuth Pulser, 1a/4 X-Band, Transceiver Version B, gearbox cabling, 2/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-Band, Transceiver Version B, gearbox cabling, combined HM and Azimuth Pulser, 2a/4 X-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, Motor and Heating cabling, 3/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, 115 V Transformer, 4/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-Band, Transceiver Version B, cabling of Interconnection Board, bulkhead housing, 1/1 . S-Band, Interconnection Transceiver, Version A and B, 1/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-Band, Transceiver Version A with Start Unit 2, gearbox cabling, 1/7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-Band, Transceiver Version B with Start Unit 2, gearbox cabling, 2/7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, Motor and Start Unit 2 cabling, 3/7 . . . . . . . . . . . . .

101 109 110 111 113 134 146 147 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 173 174 175 176 177 178 189 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_AVZ.fm / 06.09.05

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig.

12-27 12-28 12-29 12-30 12-31 13-1 13-2 13-3 13-4 13-5 13-6 13-7 13-8 13-9 13-10 13-11 13-12 13-13 13-14 13-15 13-16 13-17 13-18 13-19 13-20 13-21 13-22 13-23 13-24 13-25 13-26

List of Figures

S-Band, Transceiver Version A and B with Start Unit 1, gearbox cabling, 4/7 . . . . . . . . . . . 271 S-Band, Transceiver Version B with Start Unit 1, gearbox cabling, 5/7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 S-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, Motor, Heating and Start Unit 1 cabling, 6/7 . . . . . . 273 S-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, 115 V Transformer cabling, 7/7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 S-Band, Transceiver Version B, Connection Board in bulkhead housing, 1/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Processor Controlled Interswitch (PCI), Bulkhead,GE3023O000 BZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Display Electronics Unit with mounted Interconnection Box, GE3062G050 MB 1/3 . . . . . . . 279 Display Electronics Unit Stand-Alone, GE3062G050 MB 2/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Interconnection Box Stand-Alone,GE3062G050 MB 3/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 23" Console Monitor, yard mounting, AZ3063G055MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 23" Desktop Monitor without operating panel, AZ3063G056MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 23" Desktop Monitor with operating panel, AZ3063G057MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 C5 Console Stand-alone with 23" Monitor, AZ3063G058MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 19" Console Monitor, yard mounting, AZ3068G055MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 19" Desktop Monitor without operating panel, AZ3068G056MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 19" Desktop Monitor with operating panel, AZ3068G057MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 C5 Console Stand-alone with 19" Monitor, AZ3068G058MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 SCC C4 Console 550 mm, KS3004O000GZ 1/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 SCC C4 Console 550 mm, KS3004O000GZ 2/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 SCC C4 Console 550 mm, KS3004O000GZ 3/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 SCC C4 Console 700 mm, KS3004O100GZ 1/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 SCC C4 Console 700 mm, KS3004O100GZ 2/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 SCC C4 Console 700 mm, KS3004O100GZ 3/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 SCC C4 Console 550 mm stand-alone, KS3005O000GZ 1/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 SCC C4 Console 550 mm stand-alone, KS3005O000GZ 2/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 SCC C4 Console 550 mm stand-alone, KS3005O000GZ 3/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 SCC C4 Console 700 mm stand-alone, KS3005O100GZ 1/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 SCC C4 Console 700 mm stand-alone, KS3005O100GZ 2/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 SCC C4 Console 700 mm stand-alone, KS3005O100GZ 3/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Operating Unit (for shipyard installation), BD3027O000 MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Trackball Operating Unit (for shipyard’s installation), BD3028O000 MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_AVZ.fm / 06.09.05

11

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 List of Figures

12

Technical Manual

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_AVZ.fm / 06.09.05

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

List of Abbreviations

List of Abbreviations This list also contains abbreviations which are not used in this manual but in additional documentation.

A A/D AFC AGP ARPA ATA AZS

Analog/Digital Automatic Frequency Control Advanced Graphics Port Automatic Radar Plotting Aid Automatic Tracking Aid Azimuth Start

B BSH

Bundesamt für Seeschiffahrt und Hydrographie (Federal Maritime and Hydrographic Agency of Germany)

C CAN CD CRR CRT CWL

Controller Area Network Centred Display Close Range Resolution Cathode Ray Tube Construction Water Line

D DMA

Direct Memory Access

E EPA ECDIS

Electronic Plotting Aid Electronic Chart Display and Information System

F FIFO FTC

First In First Out (Memory) Fast Time Constant => Rain (Rain Clutter)

G GPS GVP

Global Positioning System Graphics and Video Processor

H HF HM HSC HV

High Frequency Head Marker High Speed Craft High Voltage

I IDE IEC IF IMB ISA

Intelligent Drive Electronics International Electrotechnical Commission Intermediate Frequency Interface and Memory Board Industry Standard Architecture Bus

K KBC

Keyboard Controller

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_akv.fm / 06.09.05

13

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 List of Abbreviations

14

M MMI

Man-Machine Interface

N NACOS NI NMEA NOB n.c. n.o.

Navigation and Command System NAVIGATION INTERFACE National Marine Electronics Association Number of Bits Not connected/normally closed (break contact) Normally opened (make contact)

O ONP ONN

24 V ON/OFF signal, wire with positive potential 24 V ON/OFF signal, wire with negative potential (no ground potential)

P PCB PCI PCI PMB PPI PRF PWM

Peripheral Component Interconnect Pentium Motherboard Plan Position Indicator Pulse Repetition Frequency Pulse Width Modulation

R Rev. RDC RF RGB RKE ROT RPM RSC

Revision (as-delivered status), see Section 1.2 Radar Data Converter Radio Frequency Red Green Blue Remote Keyboard Electronics Rate of Turn Revolutions per Minute Radar Scan Converter

S SCSI SI SRAM STC

Small Computer System Interface Ship’s Interface = Interface Expander Static Random Access Memory Sensitivity Time Control => Sea (Sea Clutter)

T TFT T/R TCU TM TVA

Thin Film Transistor Transmitter/Receiver Transmitter Control Unit True Motion Trigger Video Azimuth (Combined Video)

V VDR

Voyage Data Recorder

Technical Manual

Printed Circuit Board Processor-Controlled Interswitch, current designation: Interswitch

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_akv.fm / 06.09.05

1 General

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

1

1.1 Software Releases

General This Technical Manual is the technical reference manual for: RADARPILOT 1100, CHARTRADAR 1100, MULTIPILOT 1100 -

Display Electronics Unit with Interconnection Box Operating Units

NOTE: To avoid longwinded phrases, the MULTIPILOT 1100 and the RADARPILOT 1100 are named "radar" in this manual. The names MULTIPILOT, CHARTRADAR and RADARPILOT are used when it is of interest.

1.1

Software Releases As soon as important software updates can be delivered, they are mentioned in Section 7.

1.2

Hardware Versions All pcb’s and units are labelled with a sticker which shows the revision (Rev.) and the print version (for pcbs only). Modifications on a pcb or a unit cause a new revision which is marked by a figure (-, 01, 02, 03...). The numbering of the revision is continuous, even when a new print is used for a pcb. If no revision is marked, the first revision number on the label is valid.

ztr1_139.jpg

The print version of a pcb is marked by means of characters. The original version is marked with "-"; the following versions are marked with A, B, C, ... . Sometimes it is possible to update pcbs with an older print version to a higher revision, and so the print version is not a reliable characteristic for the revision of a pcb.

Rev., marked by "X"

Fig. 1-1

Order No.

Item No. of Serial No. the complete pcb with all components

Version label

ztr1_179.jpg

The pcb’s are marked with their print version. The revision status is not recognizable.

Item No. of the pcb itself, without any components Fig. 1-2

Print version

Pcb labelling

If an item has to be exchanged, the same revision or a newer one must be used. Refer to Section 7, R e v i s i o n O v e r v i e w for further information.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e01.fm / 06.09.05

15

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

1 General 1.3 General Recommendations for Installation, Maintenance and Repair Work

1.3

Technical Manual

General Recommendations for Installation, Maintenance and Repair Work SAM Electronics gives advice and recommendations for the arrangement of SAM Electronics equipment and the installation sites. A prerequisite is that the necessary drawings of the ship should be made available in good time. This advice and these recommendations are given on the basis of our up-to-date practical experience and to the best of our knowledge. However, they are given without any commitment. As far as is permissible, any liability on the part of SAM Electronics for resulting damage is expressly ruled out, regardless of whether the damage is of a direct or indirect nature. Unusual shipbuilding shapes, additions or superstructures as well as environmental influences can impair the functioning of the equipment. We are, of course, willing to help the customer with optimizing solutions subject to suitable commercial arrangements. The customer is responsible for ensuring that SAM Electronics equipment is installed properly according to our instructions and in compliance with the regulations issued by the relevant classification society and national authorities.

1.4

Safety Warnings

WARNING This unit contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe precautions for handling. The discharge of electrostatic energy into a semiconductor can destroy the semiconductor or change its properties. Before a unit’s housing is opened to remove or touch a board, the service equipment, Order No. 586-5011, must be used. 1.

The mat must be positioned at the workplace.

2.

The potential equalization cable must be connected to the snap fastener and the clamp to a suitable protective earth contact. The cable contains a 1 MΩ resistor which must not be removed.

3.

The wrist band must be put on. When the spiral cable is connected to the snap fastener, the discharge line is established.

4.

Thoroughly grounded soldering, measurement and test tools must be used. If these tools are supplied with power from the 230 VAC mains, this supply must be protected by a fault current plug, stock No. 593-8099.

Boards and units that contain ESD-endangered semiconductors are marked with the symbol shown above. All assisting persons who might come into contact with the endangered boards must also use the ESD equipment.

16

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e01.fm / 06.09.05

1 General

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

1.4 Safety Warnings

DANGER It is not permissible to connect the ship’s mains to the system before setting-to-work by a qualified technician. The mains must be switched off (e.g. by means of a common isolating switch or a circuit breaker) in the ship’s supply or the mains cable must be disconnected until setting-to-work takes place. If a synchro or a stepper is connected, dangerous voltages might be present, even although all supplies to the radar system are switched off. Capacitors and tubes can store dangerous voltages for several hours, even when they have been disconnected from the supply voltage. The man aloft switch in the Gearbox switches only the mains supply for the motor, and so dangerous voltages are present, even when the switch is set to position 0.

WARNING Pay attention to the regulations for the prevention of accidents. DANGER Even when the system is switched off, there might be a dangerous voltage present on exposed contacts. Therefore, before a unit is opened, it must be ensured that the electrical supply to all units is, and remains, disconnected from the ship’s mains. DANGER If the Scanner is stationary because the system is switched off or because the radar has been switched into stand-by mode, then unless the man aloft switch is set to 0 the Scanner might begin to rotate at any time.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e01.fm / 06.09.05

17

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

1 General

Technical Manual

1.5 Dangerous High Frequency Radiation

1.5

Dangerous High Frequency Radiation DANGER When the Scanner is rotating, there is a danger caused by high frequency radiation. Do not connect the system to the ship’s mains before setting-to-work by a qualified technician. During normal operation, the transmitter is automatically switched off with a delay of 30 s, before if the speed of the Scanner continuously falls short of 50% of its nominal speed. This function is disabled, if the service mode is activated (switch S1/8 on the RDC or S1/8 on the TCU)! DANGER Never look down into the open waveguide while the transmitter is active. Therefore, before any work in the cabling is done, it must be ensured that the electrical supply to the unit is, and remains, disconnected from the ship’s mains. There are no international standards concerning the danger caused by high frequency radiation of the kind produced by the radar antenna. In most countries, a radiation density exceeding 100 W/m² is regarded as dangerous. In some countries, values over 10 W/m² are regarded as being not completely safe. The distances from the various antennas of the radar at which the radiation density is 100 W/m² and 10 W/m², respectively, are stated in the following table.

Distance Scanner type

5 ft X-Band

8 ft X-Band

14 ft S-Band

1.6

Transceiver

Radiation density 100 W/m²

Radiation density 10 W/m²

NG3028, 12.5 kW, Version A

1.4 m

14 m

NG3028, 25 kW, Version A

2.1 m

21 m

NG3028, 25 kW, Version B

1.65 m

16 m

NG3028, 12.5 kW, Version A

0.65 m

7m

NG3028, 25 kW, Version A

1.3 m

13 m

NG3028, 25 kW, Version B

0.9 m

9m

NG3029, 30 kW, Version A

1.3 m

13 m

NG3029, 30 kW, Version B

0.7 m

7.8 m

Safety Switches The safety switches are located inside and below the Gearbox/Transceiver. Refer to the technical manual of the Gearbox/Transceiver for further information.

18

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e01.fm / 06.09.05

2 Overview

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

2

Overview The following drawing shows the structure of the radar system. It consists of 3 main groups of assemblies: The Indicator, consisting of the Display Electronics Unit, including the Monitor and the Operating Unit (various versions available). The Transceiver, which can be installed in the Gearbox (Version A, "Transmitter Up") or at a distance from the Gearbox in a housing of its own (Version B, "Transmitter Down"). The Antenna Unit, consisting of the Gearbox and the Scanner. 8 ft X-Band

5 ft X-Band

14 ft S-Band

Gearbox/ Scanner

Gearbox X-Band

Gearbox X-Band

Gearbox S-Band

Transceiver X-Band Transceiver, 12.5 kW

X-Band Transceiver, 25 kW

Version A (Transceiver mounted in the Gearbox, "Transmitter Up")

S-Band Transceiver, 30 kW

or X-Band Transceiver, 25 kW

Display Electronics Unit

Display Electronics Unit

ARPA

EPA

Interconnection Box

ztr1_007.eps

19” Monitor

Interconnection Box

250 mm PPI, TFT

23.1" Monitor

Radar Keyboard (optional) BD 3027

Gyro Log Position NMEA AIS, Analog Gyro and Pulse Log via optional Analog Interface COM-Expander Audio Alarm Off, Alarm (reserve) Dead Man Alarm, ARPA Alarm, Chart Alarm, System Alarm Interswitch (PCI) CHARTPILOT (via Ethernet LAN) Slave Monitor via optional Video Buffer/RGB Buffer

340 mm PPI, TFT

Version B (Transceiver mounted in a bulkhead housing, "Transmitter Down")

Display Electronics Unit and Interconnection Box GE 3062/64/65 VS 3034G030

Indicator Electronics as console version, desktop version or shipyard kit.

Monitors/ Operating Units

TRACKPILOT Keyboard (optional) BD 3027 Trackball BD 3028

Fig. 2-1

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e02.fm / 06.09.05

S-Band Transceiver, 30 kW

System overview

19

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

2 Overview

Technical Manual

2.1 Nomenclature

2.1

Nomenclature The nomenclature shows the versions of Gearbox, Transceiver and Indicator for the Radar 1100 series.

ztr1_166.eps

RADARPILOT CHARTRADAR MULTIPILOT

Options: 0 = no options 1 = TRACKPILOT Display Size (TFT Monitors): PPI Size 2 = 250 mm 19.0" 9 = 340 mm 23.1" Plotting Aid: AIS/EPA = manual (not for MULTIPILOT) AIS/ARPA = automatic

Fig. 2-2

20

1102 / ARPA - 2A8X

Antenna Size: 5 X = 5 ft X-Band 8 X = 8 ft X-Band 14S = 14 ft S-Band Transceiver Position: A = Gearbox (up) B = Bulkhead (down) Transceiver Type: 1 = 12.5 kW X-Band 2 = 25 kW X-Band 3 = 30 kW S-Band

Nomenclature

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e02.fm / 06.09.05

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

2 Overview

Technical Manual

2.2 Indicator

2.2

Indicator

2.2.1

Versions The Indicator consists of the Display Electronics Unit GE3062 (RADARPILOT 1100), GE3064 (CHARTRADAR 1100) or GE3065 (MULTIPILOT 1100), the Interconnection Box VS3034, the Monitor AZ30XX, the Operating Unit with the Trackball BD3028 and the optional Keyboards BD3027. Depending on the version, the Display Electronics Unit is mounted together with the Interconnection Box in a console housing or it is mounted separately. The Interconnection Box can be mounted below the Display Electronics Unit or separated from it (stand-alone version with cover). The Display Electronics Unit for the RADARPILOT is available in two different electronic versions: ARPA (corresponding to IEC 60872-1, also contains ATA functionality corresponding to IEC 60872-2) On customer request, it is possible to configure the radar as True Motion (TM) radar (contains EPA functionality corresponding to IEC 60872-3) The Display Electronics Unit for the MULTIPILOT always has the ARPA functionality (corresponding to IEC 60872-1, also contains ATA functionality corresponding to IEC 60872-2) The following mechanical versions are available: TFT shipyard installation kit: Chassis-monitor with mounting kit Operating Unit (consists of the Trackball or a holder plate equipped with Keyboards / Trackball corresponding to the order with additional shielding plate) Display Electronics Unit in a separate housing with mounted Interconnection Box or with a separate Interconnection Box. Desktop version prepared for horizontal surfaces: Desktop housing with integrated monitor with or without Operating Unit Display Electronics Unit in a separate housing with mounted Interconnection Box or with a separate Interconnection Box. Console versions: 19" TFT version completely mounted in a 550 mm console 19"/23.1" TFT version completely mounted in a 700 mm console The following monitors are available: Radar (PPI) size Resolution TFT Monitor type

250 mm

340 mm

1280x1024

1280x1024 (960)

19" AZ3068G051

23.1" AZ3063G050 or AZ3069G040

It is possible to connect up to three slave monitors via the RGB Buffer GE3044G222 or further slave monitors via an additional Video Buffer SH3023. The required technical specifications for these slave monitors depend on the settings of the Graphics And Video Processor. Ask the SAM Electronics customer support for suitable combinations. A slave monitor can get damaged if it is driven with the wrong parameters. Depending on the installation location, the Display Electronics Unit can be installed as a package with the Interconnection Box (e.g. in the console housings) or both units separately. In both versions, the housings of the units stay the same. The Interconnection Box is given an additional cover as a stand-alone unit.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e02.fm / 06.09.05

21

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

2.2 Indicator

Technical Manual

ztr1_013.jpg

2 Overview

Fig. 2-3

2.2.2

Display Electronics Unit with Interconnection Box, disassembled

Interfaces

Indicator Serial Interfaces for Ship’s Sensors The Display Electronics Unit provides four serial interfaces (RS422), which are compatible with IEC 61162-1 and IEC 61162-2. For a dual installation, these interfaces are available for other purposes, such as redundancy or extension, because the data of the sensor inputs of one radar are available for the other radars of a system, too. By means of the Interconnection Board GE3044G216, the four interfaces can be adapted also to RS232, RS422, TTL and 20 mA current loop (TTY). The type of each interface can be defined by means of plugin interface cards. The interfaces are available at the Interconnection Box. See Section 4.5.9 on page 64 for further information. Additional Sensor Interfaces It is possible to install an Analog Interface or a COM Expander (it is not possible to install both in the same Interconnection Box) in the Interconnection Box.

22

-

Analog Interface for log/gyro, AIS The Analog Interface GE3044G207 offers a gyro interface (AC/DC), a pulse log interface and a serial interface for the connection of an AIS. It is mounted inside the Interconnection Box. For further information, see Section 4.5.10 on page 68.

-

COM Expander with serial interfaces The COM Expander GE3044G210 offers five serial interfaces (inputs/outputs) which can be adapted to RS232, RS422, RS485, TTL and 20 mA current loop (TTY) or for the connection e.g. of an AIS, a unit with an NMEA interface or a bridge alarm system. For further information, see Section 4.5.12 on page 88.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e02.fm / 06.09.05

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

2 Overview

Technical Manual

2.2 Indicator

Interswitch If the system exceeds the size of a dual installation, an Interswitch (former called PCI) must be integrated to switch the video signal (TVA) of the chosen Transceiver to the Indicator actually being operated. The Interswitch is mounted in a separate housing (GE3023). RGB Buffer/Video Switch As a further option, an RGB Buffer, e.g. for the connection of up to three slave monitors, can be installed. It is mounted in the Interconnection Box. Alternatively, it is possible to connect more slave monitors via the 5-Channel Video Switch SH3023. Remote Keyboard Electronics If slave Operating Units are needed or in case of a distant installation, the so-called RKE is needed. A separate technical manual exists for the RKE. Alarm Outputs For the connection of an external (central) alarm system, there are potential-free switch contacts (inputs and outputs).

2.2.3

Operating Units

ztr1_017.jpg

The Operating Unit is divided into three sections. To operate the radar functions, only the Trackball unit is necessary. To improve the handling, an additional Radar Keyboard is available. For the integration into a NACOS system, the Operating Unit is extended by addition of the Trackpilot Keyboard, which includes the steering joystick.

Fig. 2-4

Console Operating Unit with all Keyboards

For service purposes, the Radar Keyboard and/or the Trackpilot Keyboard can be replaced by a standard PC keyboard with a PS/2 connector. By means of this keyboard, it is possible to enter numeric values and to parameterize the system in a more convenient way.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e02.fm / 06.09.05

23

2 Overview

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

2.3 Compatibility with SAM Electronics Radar / NACOS equipment

2.2.4

Monitors The monitors are not covered by this manual. For further information, see the technical manuals for the monitor.

Compatibility with SAM Electronics Radar / NACOS 1) equipment

2.3

For the CHARTRADAR 1100, see Section 2.5. RADAR equipment: The following combinations with SAM Electronics equipment are possible/not possible: The RADAR 9xxx transmitter or transmitters of older radar series cannot be used with a 1100 series Display Electronics Unit. The RADAR 9xxx Display Electronics Unit or display electronics of older radar series cannot be used with a 1100 series Display Electronics Unit. The RADAR 1000 transmitter can be used with the 1100 series Display Electronics Unit if the hardware components are of a specified revision status (see the technical documentation of the antenna (GR3017/GR3018) and Transceiver (NG3028/NG3029)). NACOS equipment: -

Connection of a TRACKPILOT 1100 or ENGINE INTERFACE The TRACKPILOT 9401 cannot be connected.

The RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR/MULTIPILOT 1100 cannot be integrated in the NACOS xx-2, xx-3 and xx-4 systems.

2.4

Prerequisite for the MULTIPILOT 1100 A CHARTPILOT 1100 must be integrated in a system with a MULTIPILOT 1100, because the chart maintenance can be performed only at a CHARTPILOT.

1)

24

Navigation and Command System

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e02.fm / 06.09.05

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

2.5

2 Overview 2.5 CHARTRADAR 1100

CHARTRADAR 1100 The hardware of the CHARTRADAR 1100 is the same as the hardware of the RADARPILOT 1100, but it is necessary to enable the CHARTRADAR software functionalities by means of an authorization code. Either the radar can be delivered as a CHARTRADAR 1100 ex works or a RADARPILOT 1100 can be updated if the prerequisites of Section 2.5.2 are fulfilled.

2.5.1

Functionalities -

Display of vector seacharts additionally to the radar video in the PPI.

-

Conning Display

2.5.2

2.5.3

Prerequisites -

The radar must be licensed by means of an authorization code ex works, or the authorization code must be ordered from the manufacturer. See Section 5 for further information.

-

Ethernet network adapter to connect the CHARTRADAR by means of the Ethernet LAN to a CHARTPILOT 1100.

-

At least one CHARTPILOT 1100 must be installed in the system.

-

Vector chart data installed at the CHARTPILOT

-

The conning display should be activated only, if a TRACKPILOT and an ENGINE INTERFACE are connected, because without these systems there is not enough data available to be displayed.

User Chart Objects User Chart Objects which have been generated on a connected CHARTPILOT 1100 can be displayed on the radar without the CHARTRADAR licensing. For this purpose, the CHARTPILOT must be configured as a connected planning system (see Section 5.11.5 on page 114) and the CHARTPILOT must be configured as a chartserver (see the technical manual of the CHARTPILOT).

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e02.fm / 06.09.05

25

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

2 Overview

Technical Manual

2.6 AIS

2.6

AIS It is possible to connect an AIS electronics unit to the radar. For further information, see the operating manual of the radar and the technical manual of the UAIS Electronics Unit DEBEG 3400. If other AIS systems are used, the minimum demands concerning functionality and interfacing corresponding to the regulations are fulfilled. SAM

SAM

GPS Antenna

VHF Antenna

Ship's sensor data RS 422

Ship's sensor data

Display Electronics Unit

CAN Bus

Interconnection Box

Ship's sensor data

Interconnection Box

1 Sensor Input 2 ) 3 Channels *

RS 422

Display Electronics Unit

RS 422

UAIS Electronics Unit

with Analog Interface Prim. Display or COM Expander Port or Ethernet LAN

Ethernet LAN

24 VDC )

*

Gyro: HDT, ROT Speedlog (bottom-track): VBW Position Sensor: GLL, VTG, DTM

CHARTPILOT 1100

ztr1_601.eps

All data are transferred with a repetition rate of 1 Hz (IEC 61162-1) except of DTM (0.1 Hz)

RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR/ MULTIPILOT 1100

Fig. 2-5

RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR /MULTIPILOT 1100

Connection of an UAIS DEBEG 3400 electronics unit

The UAIS DEBEG 3400 is connected to the Interconnection Box. The ship’s sensors are connected to the radars/MULTIPILOTs. The sensor data are transferred from the radar(s) to the AIS (in dual or multiple installations, from two radars or MULTIPILOTs as redundancy, if possible). The repetition interval of the ship’s sensor data is set automatically if the Indicator’s serial interface is configured as the AIS Navigation Data interface. It is also possible to connect the AIS by means of the Ethernet LAN. All CHARTPILOT systems receive the AIS data via the Ethernet LAN. If the AIS Electronics Unit is not connected to the LAN, only the activated targets can be displayed at the CHARTPILOT. If the AIS Electronics Unit is connected to the LAN, the complete AIS functionality is also available at the CHARTPILOT.

2.7

VDR DEBEG 4300 The VDR DEBEG 4300 can be connected to the Ethernet LAN. For the configuration of the 1100 series system which is necessary for the connection of a VDR DEBEG 4300, see Section 5.5 on page 97. For the configuration/setting-to-work of the VDR, see the documentation of the VDR.

26

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e02.fm / 06.09.05

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

3

Installation Recommendations

3.1

General Recommendations

3.1.1

Cables

3 Installation Recommendations 3.1 General Recommendations

Cable types, cable data, maximum cable length, special instructions for cable laying and connection details are defined in the Cabling Documents of the corresponding equipment (consisting of schematic diagram, remarks, cable list and connection diagram). Interface connections should be discussed and agreed with SAM Electronics. In order to ensure proper functioning of the equipment, the cable types should be selected according to the cable lists. In general, the following points must be taken into account: -

For the cables inside the units (cabinets), an extra length of 1 metre is necessary at each end. If the height of the unit exceeds 0.5 metre, an extension by 1 m plus the height of the cabinet is necessary.

-

The cables must be marked by the electrician at both ends with the cable numbers corresponding to the SAM Electronics cabling documents.

-

Where necessary, particular cable glands - marked with letters and/or numbers - are assigned to the cables. The identification letters and numbers are stated in the connection diagrams; they are either fixed to the unit or can be seen from the outline drawings (...BZ or ...MB).

-

All cables should be kept as short as possible, especially coaxial cables to minimize attenuation of signal.

-

All connectors installed outdoors (e.g. on coaxial cables) should be waterproof by design to protect against water penetration into the cable.

-

Coaxial cables should be installed in separate signal cable channels/tubes and at least 10 cm away from power supply cables. Crossing of cables should be done at right angles (90°). Coaxial cables should not be exposed to sharp bends, which may lead to change the characteristic impedance of the cable. The minimum bend radius should be 5 times the cable’s outside diameter.

-

It must be ensured that all cables - including their screens - are passed into the units in continuous lengths and are not terminated before reaching the destination equipment. This is not valid for the use of cable glands with grounding inserts. The cables must be prepared by means of a wire (0.5...1.0 mm², length: 800 mm) as shown in Figure 3-1. The wire has to be connected at the shielding terminal contact.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05

27

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

3 Installation Recommendations

Technical Manual

3.1 General Recommendations

1.

ztr1_196.jpg

3.

4.

ztr1_198.jpg

ztr1_197.jpg

ztr1_153.jpg

2.

Fig. 3-1

-

Preparation of the cable endings

When putting the cables into cable glands with grounding inserts, the procedure described must be followed (see Figure 3-2). Coaxial cables must be grounded at the cable gland or cable entry of the housing and at the suitable terminal.

The internal diameter of the sealing ring (1) must be adjusted to the cable diameter. The screen braiding (2) must be pushed over the anti-cone (3) of the grounding insert. Then the cone (4) must be put into position. The screen foil (5) must be protected against tearing by means of

28

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05

3 Installation Recommendations

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

3.1 General Recommendations

insulating tape (6) before it is unwound. Form a kind of wire from the unwound part of the foil and crimp a connector (7) to the end. The gland must be screwed tight. If the gland is screwed tight with too much strength, it can happen that the screen braiding is cut.

ztr_176.jpg

7

6

5

4

2

3

1

as short as possible

ztr_180.jpg

Fig. 3-2

ztr_178.jpg

Cable glands with grounding inserts

-

With the use of cable glands without grounding inserts, the screen braiding inside the unit must be plaited to form a "pigtail", terminated by a cable terminal, and connected to the prescribed grounding terminal. It must be ensured that the grounding lead is kept as short as possible.

-

In the case of a unit whose cable inlet consists of a hole with brackets attached on the inside and outside, the cable must be dressed as shown in Figure 3-3.

-

With multicore cables, it is useful to strip down and lace the single wires according to the terminal sequence.

-

Receptacle-type cable terminals included in the delivery must be crimped to the connecting leads by means of a suitable pair of AMP pliers. If a terminal board of a unit has no tabs for the abovementioned receptacles, other suitable cable terminals must be used.

-

Existing cable grippers in the units must be used.

-

All cable connections must be carefully checked after completion of the cable work and all cable screens must be grounded via the shortest possible connections - if not stated otherwise in the Cabling Documents/Connection Diagram.

-

All cables must be secured by means of suitable clamps (pull-relief) before entering the units.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05

29

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

3 Installation Recommendations

Technical Manual

3.1 General Recommendations

-

When soldering stripped coaxial cables to connectors, it must be ensured that the central conductor and the screening do not produce a short circuit. A short-circuit check after installation is advisable.

-

It must be ensured that cables do not block any moving parts within a unit.

-

Stuffing tubes exposed to the open air must, without fail, be sealed with compound.

-

Power leads must be protected by "slow-blow" fuses according to their cross section.

Brackets Installation cables FMGCH, FMKHC, MGCH etc.

Metal clamp inside

ztr1_072.gif

35+5

Fig. 3-3

3.1.1.1

Screen braid laid back over outer sheathing; contact with the brackets via metal clamp

Metal clamp outside

Cable inlet consisting of a hole with brackets

Maximum Cable Length

Coaxial Cable for TVA Signal The maximum length of the TVA cable must not exceed 300 m. For a length of more than 150 m, see the description of the IF-Amplifier in the technical manual of the Gearboxes/Transceivers. CAN Bus The CAN bus cabling of CAN 0 must not exceed a length of 500 m between the termination resistors when a cable FMGCH or FMKHC is used. The CAN bus cabling of CAN 1 must not exceed a length of 100 m. Ethernet LAN The Ethernet LAN thin wire cabling must not exceed a length of 185 m. Video Cable (RGB Buffer) The video cable (VGA) which is connected to the RGB Buffer must not exceed a length of 50 m.

30

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05

3 Installation Recommendations

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

3.1.1.2

3.1 General Recommendations

Cable Sets

Cable sets for the standard-cables of X/S-Band installations are no longer available. The cables can be ordered in the required length by means of the following order numbers: Cable type

3.1.2

Order No. of the individual items

Coaxial Cable Draka 1.0/4.8 AF FRNC (former TELASS 100 PE)

300006082 (535-1708)

Cable (8-core) FMKHC 4x2x0.75 (former FMGCH)

300005306 (535-4461)

Electronics Units Dimensions, weights, spaces required for service and maintenance and special installation instructions are stated in the outline drawings and installation drawings of the corresponding unit. In general, the following points also apply: -

The useful life of the components of all electronics units (display units, pulse generators, Transceivers etc.) generally decreases with increasing ambient temperature; it is therefore advisable to install such units in air-conditioned rooms. If there are no such facilities - e.g. deckhouse or space near or below the water line - these rooms must at least be dry, adequately ventilated and kept at a suitable temperature in order to prevent the formation of condensation inside these units.

-

With most electronic units, cooling takes place via the surface of the casing. The cooling must not be impaired by partial covering of the unit as a result of insulation (if any) of the room (the wall on which the casing is mounted), or by installation of the unit in a confined cabinet. Furthermore, the distance from the ceiling and the floor or from a unit situated underneath must be at least 500 mm.

-

For service purposes, a power socket (AC 220/230 V) and adequate lighting are necessary in the vicinity of each electronics unit.

-

In the area of the wheel house, the distance of each electronics unit from the magnetic standard compass or the magnetic steering compass must not be less than the permitted magnetic protection distance. This distance is measured from the centre of the magnetic system of the compass to the nearest point on the corresponding unit concerned.

-

Units which are to be used on the bridge wing must be installed inside the "wing control console" protected against the weather - if they do not at least comply with the enclosure type IP 56. In order to avoid misting of the viewing screen, 25 ... 50 W console-heating (power depending on the volume) is recommended.

-

When selecting the site of a unit, the maximum cable lengths have to be considered according to the notes in the cabling documents (remarks, cable list).

-

The accessibility for maintenance and service (stated in the outline drawings or installation drawings) must be considered.

-

The impairment of a digital read-out or a display screen by direct light from lamps or the sun must be avoided. Rear windows must be blacked out by means of roller blinds or venetian blinds.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05

31

3 Installation Recommendations

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

3.1 General Recommendations

Technical Manual

-

Disturbing reflections on the screen of a display caused by pilot lamps and illuminated signs must be prevented by suitable measures (screening or relocating).

-

When a unit is being installed, the base, floor or bulkhead must be checked to ensure that it is flat in order to avoid twisting of the unit when the fixing screws are tightened, because such twisting would impair mechanical functions. Any unevenness should be compensated for by means of spacing-washers.

-

The grounding screws of the units must be connected to the body of the ship (ground); the wire used should have a cross-sectional area of at least 6 mm. Aboard fibreglass (GRP) vessels, a "grounding network" with a high conductance - taking into consideration the working frequencies of the other equipment - must be provided in order to achieve satisfactory EMC (electromagnetic compatibility).

-

In the interests of safety during maintaining or servicing, the shipyard should provide a common isolating switch or circuit breaker (in conjunction with a contactor, if necessary) for all interconnected equipment.

-

Transportation damage, even if apparently insignificant at first glance, must immediately be examined and be reported to the freight carrier. The moment of setting-to-work of the equipment is too late, not only for reporting the damage but also for the supply of replacements.

-

The equipment should never be switched on by the electricians who did the installation work - not even just for a moment - never! This is a job for the authorized SAM Electronics service engineer.

-

3.1.3

After hand-over of the equipment in good operating condition to the customer, the Installation Report (Annex of the Warranty Certificate) should be filled in completely and then forwarded to SAM Electronics as proof of such fulfilment. It is important that these requirements be fulfilled in order to avoid the risk of losing the warranty.

Indicator All radar indicators in the wheel house must be installed in such a way that the radar observer faces in the forward direction of the ship. In the case of ferries and special-purpose vessels, the authorities (e.g. the BSH) may permit exceptions to this rule.

3.1.4

Monitors

General

32

1.

The SAM Electronics radar and navigation equipment monitors have been type-tested and are approved only in the original as-delivered condition in accordance with IMO Resolution A.694(17); they fulfil the test and approval conditions as per IEC 60945 and DIN EN 60945 ("B - protected from the weather").

2.

Changes in the monitors, such as the removal of casings or the closing of existing ventilation openings, or improper mounting of the monitors, such as installation in a different casing, will lead to loss of approval; furthermore, our warranty for any resulting damage or malfunctions will become null and void.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

3.

3 Installation Recommendations 3.1 General Recommendations

Please note: Even although the test conditions for bridge units provide for a maximum operating temperature of 55°C, continuous operation of all electronic components should, if possible, take place at ambient temperatures of only 25°C. This is a necessary prerequisite for long life and low service costs.

Installation, Mounting of Monitors 1.

Most monitors are intended for various methods of installation or mounting (mounting on the pedestal/panel, desktop or fixed mounting, or bracket mounting to allow tilting for service purposes); for details, please see the relevant installation drawings. When monitors are mounted side by side or next to a panel wall (for example), the tilting bracket for service purposes is mandatory.

2.

Existing vibration or shock absorbers must not be removed.

3.

Adequate ventilation is a necessary prerequisite for the life of the electronic components. The air inlet and outlet openings marked in the installation drawings must definitely be kept clear; coverings which restrict ventilation are not permissible.

4.

Exposure to direct sunlight can cause a considerable increase in the temperature of the unit, and might under certain circumstances lead to excess temperature. This point should already be borne in mind when the bridge equipment is being planned (sun shades, distance from the windows, ventilation, ...).

5.

The space stated in the installation drawings as being necessary for ventilation, for cable inlets, for the operating procedures and for maintenance, must be provided.

6.

If the pushbuttons of the monitor are not illuminated, an external, dimmable illumination (e.g. gooseneck light) is required for navigational use.

7.

The installation of additional active electronic components in the units or in the pedestals is not permissible.

8.

Information about necessary pull-relievers for cables is given in the installation drawings. Attention must be paid to this information so that cable breaks will not occur, e.g. during service work.

Ergonomics 1.

For observation of the screens both from a sitting position and from a standing position, a monitor inclination of about 30° to 40° (mounting of the monitors on a surface inclined at an angle of about 30° to 40°) has turned out to be favourable. This does not apply to monitors in bridge wing panels. For this purpose, as well as for the operating areas, the rules of the classification society concerned must in all cases be incorporated into the planning.

2.

The brightness of monitors is limited. Sunlight passing directly through the bridge windows - or its reflection - which falls upon the screen workplaces must be reduced by suitable means (negatively inclined window surfaces, venetian blinds, distance from the windows, dark colouring of the deckhead, ...).

3.

Monitors in the bridge wing area must be installed or mounted by suitable alignment or bulkhead/ deckhead mounting in such a way that reflections of light from the front pane of the monitor are not directed into the observer's viewing direction.

4.

The use of ordinary commercial filter plates or filter films is not permitted for items of equipment that require approval (by optical effects, "aids" of that kind can suppress small radar targets, for example).

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05

33

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

3 Installation Recommendations

Technical Manual

3.2 Specific Recommendations

3.2

Specific Recommendations

3.2.1

Internal Cabling / Prefabricated Cables The cables between the Display Electronics Unit, the Interconnection Box and the monitor are prefabricated. They are marked with numbers which correspond to the numbers of the connectors. See also Section 4.5.3.3 on page 51.

3.2.2

Recommendations Concerning the Ship’s Sensors / Redundancy The RDC offers 4 RS422 interfaces for ship’s sensors which can be converted to RS232, RS485, TTL and TTY by means of plug-in pcbs on the Interconnection Board. It is advisable to use the interfaces as shown in Figure 3-4 and Figure 3-5, which describes the connection of the ship’s sensors to the Interconnection Board in a single installation and in a dual installation. Single Installation Display Electronics Unit Gyro

Interface 1

Log

Interface 2

ztr1_118.eps

Interconnection Board

Fig. 3-4

34

Position Sensor 1

Interface 3

Position Sensor 2

Interface 4

Typical connection of ship’s sensors with serial interfaces to the RDC, single installation

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05

3 Installation Recommendations

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

3.2 Specific Recommendations

Dual Installation Display Electronics Unit 1 Gyro *)

Output 1 Output 2

Interface 1

Log *)

Output 1 Output 2

Interface 2 Interconnection Board

Position Sensor 1

Interface 3

Other Sensors

Interface 4

*) with two electrically separated outputs

Display Electronics Unit 2 Redundancy

Redundancy

Interface 1

Interface 2

ztr1_637.eps

Interconnection Board

Fig. 3-5

Position Sensor 2

Interface 3

Other Sensors

Interface 4

Typical connection of ship’s sensors with serial interfaces to the RDC, dual installation

For further information, see the cabling diagrams in Section 12 and the description of the RDC in Section 4.5.4, page 53.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05

35

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

3 Installation Recommendations

Technical Manual

3.2 Specific Recommendations

For ship’s sensors with Analog Interfaces, the Analog Interface must be used. The system can also contain two Analog Interfaces for redundancy purposes. Single Installation without Redundancy

Position Sensor 1

Output

Connection Board

RDC pcb

Display Electronics Unit

ztr1_162.eps

Nav Bus Gyro

Gyro interface

Log

Log interface Analog Interface

AIS

Fig. 3-6

Typical connection of ship’s sensors to the Analog Interface without redundancy

Dual Installation with Redundancy Output 1 Position Sensor 1*) Output 2 *) with two electrically separated outputs

Interconnection Board

Interconnection Board

RDC pcb

RDC pcb

Display Electronics Unit

Display Electronics Unit Nav Bus

Gyro

Gyro interface

Log

Log interface

ztr1_638.eps

Analog Interface 1

Fig. 3-7

36

Gyro interface

Log interface AIS

*)

Analog Interface 2

*) Connect to Analog Interface 2 The AIS must not be connected to both Analog Interfaces

Typical connection of ship’s sensors to the Analog Interface with redundancy

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

3.2.3

3 Installation Recommendations 3.2 Specific Recommendations

Recommendations Concerning the Connection of a UAIS DEBEG 3400

Connection via RS422 Interface: In a single installation, an Analog Interface or a COM Expander must be provided to connect the AIS system. If a second Analog Interface exists (usually in dual or multiple installations for redundancy connection of an analog gyro), the AIS must be connected to the Analog Interface 2 (usually at Indicator No. 2). The AIS electronics unit must not be connected to both Analog Interfaces! In dual or multiple installations with an analog gyro it is recommended that two Analog Interfaces be used to achieve redundancy of the ship’s sensors (see Section 3.2.2). Connection via Ethernet LAN: The AIS can be connected via Ethernet LAN, so that it is not necessary to install an Analog Interface.

3.2.4

Recommendations Concerning the Compass Interface ATTENTION Setting the compass input to serial IEC 61162-1 data (HDT message with 4800 Baud and 1 Hz repetition rate) will result in degradation of stabilization smoothness. Therefore such compass installations should only be used for stabilization purposes of EPA radars. For any installation which is required to meet the IEC 60872-1 (ARPA) or IEC 60872-2 (ATA) specification, the serial data of the gyro compass must conform to the IEC 61162-2 standard. The interface shall provide a heading data update rate of at least 20 Hz for normal radar and 40 Hz for HSC radar. ATTENTION (compass systems with synchro transmission) Setting the compass ratio input to 90:1 will result in degradation of stabilization smoothness and accuracy. Therefore this setting should not be used where: -

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05

the radar installation has to meet the IMO/IEC Radar Performance Standards type approval certification is required the ARPA option is fitted.

37

3 Installation Recommendations 3.2 Specific Recommendations

3.2.5

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

Recommendations Concerning the Position Systems It must be noted that the necessary accuracy is achieved only if all positions used relate to the same chart datum, preferably WGS 84.

-

-

1)

38

When using a planning system, position coordinates obtained from a chart with a datum deviating from WGS 84 can be converted to WGS 84 map and track data. The only position receivers that may be connected to the radar system or NACOS system are those that output the position values in the geographical reference system WGS84 via an interface as per IEC 61162-1 1). If the radar is installed in conjunction with a navigation system (NACOS/TRACKPILOT), see the appropriate manuals.

This part of IEC 61162 is closely aligned with NMEA 0183 Version 2.3 dated March 1, 1998

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05

4 Functional Description

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

4.1 Block Diagram

4

Functional Description

4.1

Block Diagram The radar system can be extended to up to five MULTIPILOT or RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR 1100 units. If there are more than two Display Electronics Units or Transceivers in one system, it is necessary to use an Interswitch in a separate housing to switch the radar videos (TVA signals). The "power on" concept stays the same. The optional Interswitch and the Analog Interface are permanently connected to the ship’s mains.

SAM SAM

Gearbox Gearbox Transceiver (Version A/B) with power supply and relay

Transceiver (Version A/B) with power supply and relay

1-ph / 3-ph Ship's Mains

1-ph / 3-ph Ship's Mains

AIS

CAN 1, Nav Bus CAN 0, Radar Bus

Ship’s Data

Log GPS NMEA

Ship´s Data

TVA 1 out TVA 2 out

Gyro TVA CAN 0 Power On

Mains

TVA 1 out TVA 2 out

Gyro in

Display Electronics GE3062/64/65

CAN 1, Nav Bus CAN 0, Radar Bus

CH1...5 CAN 0

CH1 ... CH5

out

Interswitch ≥ 3 Radars (optional)

Log GPS NMEA Mains

TVA CAN 0 Power On

Display Electronics GE3062/64/65

with optional Analog Interface or COM-Expander

with optional Analog Interface or COM-Expander

RGB RGB Buffer (optional)

PowerOn Signal

PowerOn Signal

RGB

RGB RGB

Mains

Mains

Monitor AZ 30xx

Monitor AZ 30xx

To SlaveMonitor

Data (PS/2) ztr1_005.eps

Data (PS/2)

Operating Unit BD3027

Fig. 4-1

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

Operating Unit BD3027

Block diagram with wiring concept

39

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

4 Functional Description

Technical Manual

4.2 "Power On" Concept

4.2

"Power On" Concept

Transceiver Electronics Unit 1

Transceiver Electronics Unit 2

Mains Input Unit

Mains Input Unit

Ship's mains 24V ON/OFF (ONP/ONN)

Ship's mains 24V ON/OFF (ONP/ONN)

Monitor

Monitor Power switch

Power switch

Ship's mains

TB13

Ship's Mains

TB10

T1

TB4

Interconnection Box

CR1

TB13

TB5

Ship's mains

TB3

TB4

Ship's mains

Interconnection Box

CR1 24V ON/OFF (ONP/ONN)

TB3

K1

TB11 Ship's mains

Display Electronics Unit 1 ztr1_060.eps

TB5

T1

24V ON/OFF (ONP/ONN)

from/to other units

TB10

K1

TB11 Ship's mains

Display Electronics Unit 2

24V ON/OFF (ONP/ONN)

Fig. 4-2

"Power on" concept

The system is switched on by means of the mains power switch of the master monitor. The master monitor is supplied with power by the Interconnection Box. If the mains switch of the monitor is switched to position "On", the mains supply is led back to the transformer T1 in the Interconnection Box. The transformer and a rectifier generate the voltage 24V ON/OFF. In contrast to the name, the voltage is about 30...36 VDC without load. In the circuit diagrams, the two wires of 24V ON/OFF are also called ONP and ONN. The signal is not connected to a ground potential. It is not permissible to use ONN as a GND line or to use ONP as a power supply line. 24V ON/OFF is connected as an output to TB3 and switches the relay K1 in the Interconnection Box. K1 switches the mains power supply of the Display Electronics Unit and of an optional slave monitor. If there are more radars or MULTIPILOTs in the system, the 24V ON/ OFF signals of these units are connected as an input on TB3, too. The signals are connected by strip

40

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

4 Functional Description 4.2 "Power On" Concept

conductors, so that all radars/MULTIPILOTs of a system get the signal if only one radar has been switched on. This is necessary to enable the user to obtain the radar video of a second system whose Indicator has not been switched on. The remote video inputs and outputs are delivered by the Display Electronics Unit. The 24V ON/OFF signal is led to all Transceivers of a system. At Transceivers NG3028/NG3029, it is connected to TB 3 of the connection board GR3017G200 and switches the mains supply relay for the mains input of the mains input unit NG3028G204. In version A, the unit NG3028G204 is situated in the Gearbox. In version B it is situated in the bulkhead housing. The BIOS settings must be correct to have the radar started as described above. If the BIOS settings are incorrect, the radar might not start. NOTE: If the Display Electronics Unit is supplied by a UPS, the Transceiver Electronics Unit must not be connected to TB5. The mains supply for the Transceiver must be connected independently from the UPS. Only if the capacity of the UPS is sufficient for the supply of the Transceiver and the motor (in 1-ph systems), can TB5 be used.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

41

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

4 Functional Description

Technical Manual

4.3 CAN Bus Concept / Termination

4.3

CAN Bus Concept / Termination Transceiver 1

Transceiver 2 CAN0 termination

TP53 1/2

TP53 1/2

TCU

J2

J1 TB3

J1 TB3

max. length of CAN 0 500 m between the termination resistors

TP78 1/2

J7 J5 (CAN1)

Interconnection Board

CAN1 term.

Connection Board

CAN0

J7 J5 (CAN1) Analog Interface

TCU

J2

Connection Board

CAN0

CAN0 termination

TB3

Interconnection Box

Interconnection Board

Analog Interface

TP78 1/2

CAN1 term.

TB3

Interconnection Box

J1

J1 CAN1 Interface Expander (optional)

CAN0 & CAN1 CAN0 & CAN1

CAN0 & CAN1

CAN0 termination TP161 1/2

CAN0 termination TP161 1/2

CAN1 termination TP162 1/2

CAN1 termination TP162 1/2

RDC

Display Electronics Unit 1

Display Electronics Unit 2 This symbol shows an available connector for the termination of a CAN bus in the drawing above. Do not connect jumpers to all termination connectors. Each CAN bus must be terminated by means of only 2 jumpers. See the following descriptions to choose the correct units for the termination. Never leave out the termination.

ztr1_175.eps

ztr1_125.eps

RDC

Fig. 4-3

CAN bus concept and termination

WARNING If the termination is not performed, the system might work unreliably!

42

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

4 Functional Description

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

4.3 CAN Bus Concept / Termination

Figure 4-3 shows the principle of the wiring of the CAN bus system. The example shows a dual installation, version A. The termination resistors must only be implemented at the beginning and at the end of a CAN line. For further examples, see the technotes. The CAN wires should be as short as possible. Advice for the Termination of the CAN Buses 1.

Determine the beginning and the end of a CAN bus.

2.

Terminate the CAN bus only at the beginning and at the end.

3.

The CAN bus (CAN 1) is also connected to an optional trackpilot. It is possible that the TRACKPILOT is connected at the beginning or the end of a CAN bus wiring.

CAN0 CAN0 is also called the "radar bus". By means of the radar bus, the system is controlled; all orders and parameters are sent via the radar bus. For the example on page 42, CAN0 should be terminated at TP53 1/2 of both Transceivers. If a direct CAN0 connection between the Transceiver electronics units has been performed, the termination must be performed at the TCU (TP53 1/2) of the last Transceiver in the CAN0 line and at TP161 1/ 2 of the last RDC of one Display Electronics Unit in the CAN0 line. If an Interswitch (PCI) is used in a separate housing, it might be necessary to terminate CAN0 at the Interswitch pcb. CAN1 CAN1 is also called the "navigation bus" or "nav bus". The data of the ship’s sensors, such as position data, speed data and gyro data, are sent via the nav bus. For the example on page 42, CAN1 should be terminated at both RDCs’ TP162 1/2.

WARNING If the cable connection between J5 of the Interconnection Board and J7 of the Analog Interface or of the COM Expander is not present (e.g. no Analog Interface is installed), the CAN bus output terminals of TB3 have no function. In this case, the following pins of the Interconnection Board must be short-circuited by means of jumpers: J5 1/2 J5 3/4 J5 5/6 J5 7/8

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

43

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

4 Functional Description

Technical Manual

4.4 Termination of RS422 Interfaces

4.4

Termination of RS422 Interfaces Single Talker/Single Listener In single talker / single listener systems via the Interconnection Board, it is not necessary to terminate the RS422 interface, because the interface is always terminated at the IMB. In single talker/single listener systems via the COM Expander, it is necessary to terminate the RS422 interface at TP3 of the plug-in adapter pcb GE3044G218. See page 78 for a description of TP3. RS422 connected to interconnection board Ship's sensor

Interconnection Board

Indicator

RS422 IMB Internal termination

RS422 connected to COM expander COM Expander Ship's sensor

RS422

Indicator

GE3044G218

ztr1_649.eps

TP3

Jumpers must be set to TP3

Fig. 4-4

Termination of a single talker/single listener RS422 connection

Single Talker/Multi Listener Single talker/multi listener connections result from sensors which are connected to two Indicators (redundancy). The serial connection must be terminated at the Indicator with the longest distance to the ship’s sensor. For a RS422 connection via the Interconnection Board, the termination is given by the IMB, so that the termination at the Indicator with the shorter distance must be deactivated. This must be performed by means of an additional plug-in adapter pcb GE3044G218. The pcb GE3044G218 must be connected to the Interconnection Board and all jumpers on TP3 must be removed. See page 78 for a description of TP3.

44

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

4 Functional Description

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

4.4 Termination of RS422 Interfaces

Interconnection Board Ship's Sensor

RS422

Indicator 1

GE3044G218 TP3

IMB All jumpers from TP3 must be removed

Interconnection Board

internal termination

Indicator 2

ztr1_650.eps

IMB internal termination

Fig. 4-5

Termination of a single talker / multi listener RS422 connection (via Interconnection Board)

For a RS422 connection via the COM Expander, the termination resistor must be deactivated at the Indicator which is closer to the ship’s sensor (all jumpers must be removed from TP3 of the plug-in adapter pcb GE3044G218). It must be activated at the Indicator which is farther away from the ship’s sensor (jumpers must be set to TP3 of the plug-in adapter pcb GE3044G218). See page 78 for a description of TP3. COM Expander Ship's Sensor

RS422

Indicator 1

GE3044G218 TP3

Jumpers must be removed from TP3

Com Expander

Indicator 2

GE3044G218

ztr1_651.eps

TP3

Jumpers must be set to TP3

Fig. 4-6

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

Termination of a single talker / multi listener RS422 connection (via COM Expander)

45

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

4 Functional Description

Technical Manual

4.4 Termination of RS422 Interfaces

Separate Serial Interfaces If the sensor has two separate outputs, then they must be used to install two single talker / single listener connections and it is not necessary to modify the termination. Interconnection Board Ship's Sensor

Indicator 1

RS422

IMB

RS422

internal termination

COM Expander

Indicator 2

GE3044G218

ztr1_652.eps

TP3

46

Jumpers must be set to TP3

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

4 Functional Description

Technical Manual

4.5 Display Electronics Unit

Display Electronics Unit

4.5.1

System

ztr1_001.eps

4.5

LOG Gyro Serial I/O Position NMEA CAN0 CAN1

TVA1 TVA2

Radar alarm Target alarm Dead man alarm trigger Chart alarm Audio alarm ack. Reserve

R to Monitor G B

TVA1 out (Remote video)

Buzzer

Graphics & Video Processor (GVP)

RDC

Reset Monitor control (COM1) Speaker Debug port (COM2) Parallel port

LAN

Trackball (PS/2) Keyboard (PS/2)

1

2

Par.

PS/2 PS/2

COM

AGP slot PCI

Power Supply (ATX)

CPU Module Pentium

On/Off Mains

ISA

RAM

Diskette drive ATX motherboard

Fig. 4-7

IDE1 IDE2

RADARPILOT: IDE flash module to IDE1 MULTIPILOT: Hard-disk/DVD drive to IDE1 IDE flash module to IDE2

Block diagram of the Display Electronics Unit

The block diagram does not show the correct order of the pcb’s. This order depends on the type of motherboard which is used in the Display Electronics Unit. See Section 4.5.3 for further information.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

47

4 Functional Description

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

4.5 Display Electronics Unit

Technical Manual

The Display Electronics Unit contains the following components: -

Pentium motherboard (PMB) Radar Data Converter (RDC) IDE memory module Graphics and Video Processor (GVP) Power supply Interconnection Board LAN Network Adapter RGB Buffer (optional) Hard Disk drive, DVD-ROM drive for MULTIPILOT, diskette drive

The monitors are not dealt with in this manual. Separate technical manuals are available for all types which can be serviced. The monitors can be connected to the Display Electronics Unit or to the RGB Buffer. The Display Electronics Unit has to process the radar video and to act as the interface to the user together with the Operating Unit and the monitor. The functions are described in detail in the following chapters.

4.5.2

Housing The components of the Display Electronics Unit are mounted in a metal housing.

48

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

4 Functional Description

Technical Manual

4.5 Display Electronics Unit

4.5.3

Pentium Motherboard (PMB) CAUTION The motherboard shown and described below is only an example (version DFI CA64). The Display Electronics Unit may be equipped with a different motherboard to keep up with technical progress. PCI slots

ISA slot (not used) BIOS Slot 1

2

3

4

Slot 5 AGP slot

Memory banks

Main processor with fan

Power supply connector

5

ztr1_015.jpg

1

Slot 3 Slot 4

Slot 2

Power On, LED, Lock, Reset, Speaker connectors Fig. 4-8

IDE connectors Floppy connector Example of a motherboard (ATX) in the Display Electronics Unit

WARNING Do not modify the jumper settings of the motherboard. The jumpers are set in the factory. WARNING If different motherboards can be used, see Section 7, R e v i s i o n O v e r v i e w for further information about prerequisites.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

49

4 Functional Description

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

4.5 Display Electronics Unit

Technical Manual

4.5.3.1

Hardware Description, Types of Motherboards

The main processor is the Pentium processor on the motherboard. The motherboard is a PC board of the ATX standard with sockets for CPU, BIOS, RAM, ISA cards and PCI cards. The interfaces of the motherboard are shown in the block diagram in Figure 4-7. An example of the position of the connectors is shown in Figure 4-9. The location and the number of connectors depend on the version of the motherboard. For the sequence of the pcb’s in the PCI slots, see Section 4.5.3.2 on page 50. Types of Motherboards The Display Electronics Unit may be equipped with different motherboards to keep up with technical progress. The different versions of the motherboards can be recognized by means of the number of PCI/ ISA slots and some labels of the manufacturer. Some types of motherboards have an onboard sound card. In this case, the sound option must be disabled in the BIOS settings (see Section 5.14) and, in case of exchange, the covers must be removed from the openings for the sound card connectors in the electronics unit’s housing. At present, the following type of motherboard is used: Type of motherboard

Number of ISA slots

Number of PCI slots

1

5

DFI CA64

Position of the manufacturer’s label - On the housing of the parallel interface

Connection of the Buzzer The speaker output of the motherboard is connected to E20/1 of the RDC. The position of the connector on the motherboard depends on the version of the motherboard. Usually, the motherboard pcb is inscribed accordingly. See Figure 4-8 for an example. Only one contact of the connector is used. If the cable is connected to the wrong connector, the buzzer does not work.

4.5.3.2

Position of the Pcbs in the Motherboard’s Slot

The pcb’s which are described in the following sections have to be plugged in at a defined PCI slot. It is not permissible to change the position of the pcb’s on the motherboard. If a pcb has been plugged in at the wrong PCI slot, then unforeseen faults will probably occur. CAUTION For the slot numbers, see Figure 4-8 on page 49. The numbers printed on the motherboard pcb may be different and are not valid. Start to count from the ISA slots onwards in direction of the processor, as shown in Figure 4-8. The number of ISA and PCI slots depends on the motherboard type. The position of the pcbs must NOT be changed! PCI Slot No. 1) PCB

1)

50

DFI CA64

Ethernet module

2

GE3044G219 (RDC)

5

The slot numbers printed on the pcb are not valid! See Figure 4-8 on page 49 for the correct sequence.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

4 Functional Description

Technical Manual

4.5 Display Electronics Unit

4.5.3.3

Connectors at the Rear of the Display Electronics Unit

5

9

ztr1_078.jpg

4

1

2

3

Fig. 4-9

No. of Contact

1)

6

7

8

10

11

12

13

14

15

Interface connectors at the rear of the Display Electronics Unit

Function

1

Mains connector

2

Voltage selector (115/230 V). If this switch is not provided, the power supply unit adapts automatically to the mains supply voltage.

3

Mains switch (Important: The system must be switched on / off by means of the monitor mains switch! This switch should be used for service purposes only.)

4

Supply connector for the Operating Unit (= 5)

5

Supply connector for diskette drive or Operating Unit or Interconnection Board GE3044G216 if plug-in pcbs are used (= 4). This connector is currently not delivered ex works. It must be mounted additionally (GE3044G052, order No. 2776376) if necessary.

6

Trackball connector

7

Keyboard connector

8

USB connector, not used

9

Parallel port, not used

10

Serial port, for monitor OSD data (depending on monitor type), to J3 of the Interconnection Box

11

Serial port, not used

12 1)

VGA connector for Monitor or to RGB Buffer in the Interconnection Box or the 5-Channel Video Switch

13 1)

VGA connector for RDC input (TVA1, TVA2, TVA1 out), to J4 of the Interconnection Box

14

1)

RDC connector, to J1 of the Interconnection Box

15

1)

Ethernet module (optional)

The positions of the connectors depend on the motherboard type. See Section 4.5.3.2.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

51

4 Functional Description

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

4.5 Display Electronics Unit

Technical Manual

ztr1_101.jpg

The connectors for the supply of power to the keyboard and the plug-in adapter pcbs are similar. The 12 V supply is not needed.

52

12 V

5V

If plug-in pcbs for the interface conversion are mounted, the Interconnection Board needs a separate power supply cable, which must be connected at one of these connectors. The second connector is currently not delivered ex works. It must be mounted additionally (kit VS3034G035, Order No. 390002198) if necessary.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

4 Functional Description

Technical Manual

4.5 Display Electronics Unit

4.5.4

Radar Data Converter (RDC) GE3044G219

DIP Switch S1/1...4, Indicator Number On=closed=0; off=open=1

DIP Switch S1/5...8

Switch No.

Sets Indicator No. to 1

4

3

2

1

On

On

On

On

Sets Indicator No. to 2

On

On

On

Off

Sets Indicator No. to 3

On

On

Off

On

Sets Indicator No. to 4

On

On

Off

Off

Sets Indicator No. to 5

On

Off

On

On

All other settings are not admissible

1)

TP162 1/2

Speaker TP161 E15 E20 E2 TP151TP152 TP162 DS4 DS6 DS5 DS7 1

1

1

1

1 E28 1 E25

J2

1 1

OFF

Boot from IDE memory module (default)

Boot from diskette drive (the software update routine is started while booting).

6

Monitor resolution 1024x768

Monitor resolution 1280x1024

7

Monitor frequency 72 Hz

Monitor frequency 60 Hz

8

Normal operation (default)

Service Mode On 1)

See section S e r v i c e S w i t c h o f t h e R D C on page 57. Settings for the Different Monitor Types

TP161 = CAN0, TP162 = CAN1 Jumper on 1/2 = CAN bus terminated No jumper on 1/2 = CAN bus not terminated See also Section 4.3 on page 42.

1

ON

5

CAN Bus Termination TP161 1/2

Function

8

Monitor

S1/6

S1/7

AZ3069G040

Off

Off

AZ3063G04x/5x

Off

Off

AZ3068G04x/5x

Off

Off

AZ3065G040

Off

Off

S1 E10/ 1 E11 1 1

Monitor

S1/6

S1/7

AZ3066G040

On

Off

AZ3056G04x

Off

Off

DS8 DS10 DS2 E18 DS9 DS1 DS3 E1

E4

DS12 DS11 DS13

1

1 E12 1 1

1

1 1

1 E27

1

E14

E16

1

1

ztr1_623.jpg

1 E26

E17

E19

TP103 TP102 TP101 TP100

Termination of serial interface 4 serial interface 3 serial interface 2 serial interface 1

E5 E3, ext. Reset contact

Motherboard ztr1_011.jpg

J4

E5/2 E5/1 E20/1

Fig. 4-10

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

RDC pcb

53

4 Functional Description

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

4.5 Display Electronics Unit

Technical Manual

Watchdog If an error is detected in the electronics units‘ components, a red screen is generated and by means of the reset wire between the RDC and the motherboard, the motherboard is reset. In case of such a reset, the system reboots. If the reset cable is not connected, the red screen is displayed permanently to indicate the error, because the reset cannot be performed. Connectors/Jumpers/Test Pins E1, E4, E10, E11, E12, E14, E16, E25, E26, E27, E28 are for the manufacturer‘s use only. It is not permissible to connect cables or jumpers to one of these contacts. Jumpers which have been set in the factory must not be removed!

E2 1 2

Function Not used (1: speaker signal, 2,3: not connected, 4: GND Output for an internal speaker)

3 4

E3 1

Function Not used (a zero-potential touch contact can be connected as a reset button)

2

E5

Function

1 2

Watchdog functionality of the RDC. Reset output, zero potential. Must be connected to the reset input of the Display Electronics Unit‘s motherboard. For motherboard DFI CA64: E5/1 to the left pin of the reset input, E5/2 to the right pin.

E15

Function

1

AGND (analog GND)

3

TVA signal test point (TVA1, TVA2 or TVA test signal). Trigger=+2 V, Video=-2 V, AZIMUTHSTART=-4 V, AZIMUTHDAT=-2 V, see Figure 4-11 on page 57.

E17

Function

1

Trigger signal (TTL high pulse)

2

Synchronization start signal (TTL low pulse)

3

Synchronization data (TTL)

E18 1

Function GND

E19 1

54

Function AGND (analog GND)

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

4 Functional Description

Technical Manual

4.5 Display Electronics Unit

E20

Function

1...4

Speaker input, must be connected to the speaker output of the motherboard. Only pin 1 is used.

TP100...103

Function

1 2

Termination of the serial interfaces. Jumper on 1/2 = termination with 120 Ω (default) No jumper on 1/2 = no termination TP100 = serial interface 1, TP101 = serial interface 2, TP102 = serial interface 3, TP103 = serial interface 4

TP151

Function

1

Jumper on 2/3 = alarm acknowledge input (Interconnection Board TB2 13/14) suitable for 20 mA current loop (optocoupler driver input) Jumper on 1/2 and 3/4 = zero potential input (switch)

2 3 4

TP152

Function

1

Jumper on 2/3 = Digital input (Interconnection Board TB2 15/16) suitable for 20 mA current loop (optocoupler driver input) Jumper on 1/2 and 3/4 = zero potential input (switch) This input can be used to turn the headmarker by 180° by means of an external contact. This function must be configured in the System Maintenance Manager (Configure). If the external contact is closed, the headmarker is turned. This function must not be used in NACOS systems.

2 3 4

LEDs Function While system booting

During operation

DS1 green

ON

ON = DSP2 selftest failed

DS1 red

OFF

ON = DSP1 selftest failed

DS2 green

ON

Toggle = DSP2 host communication failure

DS2 red

OFF

Toggle = DSP1 PCI overrun

DS3 green

ON

Toggles for each antenna turn (DSP2)

DS3 red

OFF

Toggles for each antenna turn (DSP1)

Function ON

OFF

DS4 green UART 1

Interrupt in process

Interrupt finished

DS4 red UART 0

Interrupt in process

Interrupt finished

DS5 green UART 3

Interrupt in process

Interrupt finished

DS5 red UART 2

Interrupt in process

Interrupt finished

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

55

4 Functional Description

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

4.5 Display Electronics Unit

Technical Manual

DS6 green CAN1

Interrupt in process

Interrupt finished

DS6 red CAN0

Interrupt in process

Interrupt finished

DS7 green

Toggle on every interrupt entry

DS7 red

Not used

Function DS8 green

On = PCI DMA running

DS8 red

On = PCI DMA inactive

DS9 green

On = DSPs are not held

DS9 red

On = DSPs are held

DS10 green

On = ARPA DMA running

DS10 red

On = ARPA DMA inactive

Function DS11 green

No function

DS11 red

Syndat signal failure (TVA signal)

DS12 green

Manufacturer‘s use

DS12 red

Trigger signal failure (TVA signal)

DS13 green

Manufacturer‘s use

DS13 red

Synstart signal failure (TVA signal)

4.5.4.1 The 1. 2. 3. 4.

Alarm Contacts alarm outputs are: Radar alarm Dead man alarm trigger Target Alarm (formerly ARPA Alarm) Chart alarm

The alarm inputs are: 1. Audio Alarm Acknowledge 2. Not used The outputs are relay contacts. The maximum load of the contacts is 24 V/0.3 A. The inputs can be switched by means of TP151 and TP152 to zero potential inputs (switch, relays) or suitable for 20 mA current loop (optocoupler driver input). For further information on the alarms, see the operating instructions.

56

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

4 Functional Description

Technical Manual

4.5 Display Electronics Unit

4.5.4.2

Service Switch of the RDC

The service switch of the RDC (S1/8) also activates the service functions of the TCU, so that it is not necessary to set the service switch S1/8 of the TCU additionally (see the technical manual of the Gearboxes/Transceivers). If the service switch of the TCU is activated, the service mode functions of the RDC are not available, so that it is advisable to activate the service mode by means of the service switch of the RDC. If the service mode is activated by means of the DIP switch S1/8, the following functions are available: -

-

Acquire targets without gyro data (to test ARPA functions). Acquire targets without Radar Bus data. Display the radar video although the Radar Bus is not working correctly. Activation of a check mode during the start. The sequential start of the processes is displayed. When an error crops up, the booting routine is stopped immediately and the faulty process can be recognized. Access to Service Menus without password. Activation of the TCU service mode with the following functions: If the Scanner stops turning, the Transceiver is not switched off. If the magnetron current exceeds or falls short of its limits, the Transceiver is not switched off. If a communication time-out occurs in the communication with the master Indicator, the Transceiver is not switched off.

The maintenance menus can be entered and used without the use of the service switch. The switch offers the additional functionalities described above, especially for the setting-to-work phase. NOTES: As soon as setting-to-work, maintenance or service work has been finished, the service mode must be switched off! -

The service mode must not be active during normal operation!

-

If the service switch is activated during normal operation, a frozen radar video might be displayed at the Indicator if the Transceiver is switched off!

-

If the service mode is activated, the Transceiver is not switched off automatically when the Scanner stops turning!

4.5.4.3

Adjustments

2 ms / 1 ms / 0.5 ms

U +2 V/75 Ohm

100 µs 5 µs

5 µs

Trigger

Trigger Video

ztr1_024.ceps

-2 V/75 Ohm

~15 µs Azimuth data LSB MSB

-4 V/75 Ohm Azimuth start

Fig. 4-11

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

t

The TVA signal

57

4 Functional Description

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

4.5 Display Electronics Unit

Technical Manual

Figure 4-11 shows an idealized diagram of the TVA signal. In the Radar 1100 series, the adjustments can be performed by means of the System Maintenance Manager software. The values are measured and set automatically. For further information, see Section 5.12.1 on page 140.

4.5.4.4

Functional Description

Interfaces The RDC contains inputs for the connected sensors and outputs for alarms. 4 serial interfaces RS422 for the standard sensors, 2 CAN bus interfaces (Radar Bus and Nav Bus), 4 alarm outputs (incl. 1 dead man alarm) and 2 alarm inputs are available. It is advisable to use the serial interfaces as shown in Section 3.2.2, page 34 and in the cabling documents. Radar Video Processing The RDC unit transfers the processed radar video via the PCI bus with a frame rate of at least 15 Hz to the Graphics And Video Processor (GVP). The DSP software includes the functions Range Scale, North-Up Stabilization and True Motion Stabilisation. The video processing includes gain adjustment, Rain (FTC), Auto Rain, Interference Rejection, Direct Video, Video STC, Video Enhancement (if Clean Sweep is switched on) and turn-by-turn correlation. ARPA Functions The RDC is not responsible for the complete ARPA functionality. The ARPA processing (acquisition, tracking, zone control, display of tracked targets) is done by the main processor on the motherboard (PMB). The RDC prepares the combined video signal and transfers it via the PCI bus to the main processor. Memory The RDC has a battery buffered memory which saves the radar status and configuration data, for example the boot mode of the MULTIPILOT or the current operator settings during the power down of the system, so that it can be started again with the same settings. The operating system, the application software, the configuration data and data such as the map and track data are stored in the IDE memory module and/or the hard-disk of the MULTIPILOT.

58

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

4 Functional Description

Technical Manual

4.5 Display Electronics Unit

4.5.5

IDE Memory Module (GE3062G001)

ztr1_625.jpg

Master/slave switch

Fig. 4-12

IDE memory module

In the RADARPILOT 1100, the IDE memory module must be connected to the IDE1 connector of the motherboard. In the MULTIPILOTPILOT 1100, the IDE memory module must be connected to the IDE2 connector of the motherboard (the hard-disk/DVD drive is connected to the IDE1 connector). It contains the operating system and the application software of the radar. The operating system and the application software of the MULTIPILOT are stored on the hard-disk. In case of a hard-disk failure, the MULTIPILOT can be booted from the IDE memory module and operates as a standard radar. See Section 8.2.6 on page 183 for detailed information. The configuration parameters are always saved in the IDE memory module. Different versions of the IDE memory module will be used in accordance with the technical progress. The modules have a switch or a jumper for the master/slave mode selection. They must always be configured as master. The power supply for the module is the same as for a hard-disk drive.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

59

4 Functional Description

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

4.5 Display Electronics Unit

Technical Manual

Graphics and Video Processor (GVP) GE3044G213

ztr1_014.jpg

4.5.6

Fig. 4-13

Example for a Graphics And Video Processor

The Graphics And Video Processor is a standard video adapter card with the following specifications: -

AGP bus interface 8 MB video RAM Video output with VGA connector, synchronization coupled to green signal or separate signals QNX-qualified

Depending on technical progress it is possible, that different versions of the Graphics And Video Processor are used. The main processor’s software controls the overlay of the MMI graphics, the line graphics of the PPI area, the ARPA/plot graphics and the radar video (generated by the RDC unit), by the use of "intelligent“ copy commands to the graphics processor of the GVP unit. The function Centred Display and the calculation of the afterglow lines of the trails and targets are performed by software through the main processor and the GVP. No settings or adjustments have to be performed at the pcb.

60

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

4 Functional Description

Technical Manual

4.5 Display Electronics Unit

4.5.7

Power Supply The power supply for the Display Electronics Unit is a standard PC power supply corresponding to the ATX specification. It supplies the following voltages: +3.3 V +5 V +12 V -12 V -5 V +5 V stand-by

ztr1_022.jpg

-

Power Supply

NOTE The power supply is equipped with a protective against tottering contacts. If the power supply is switched off and on within 0.5 s, the power supply does not start and it must be switched off for 5...10 s until it can be switched on again.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

61

4 Functional Description

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

4.5 Display Electronics Unit

Technical Manual

4.5.8

Ethernet Module

T

The Ethernet network adapter is needed for the integration of the radar into a NACOS system. It is not needed for a single, dual or multiple radar installation but it can be used to connect a DEBEG AIS or VDR system. The Ethernet module is plugged into the motherboard slot. The wiring must be done following Figure 4-14 with 50 Ω coaxial cable (for example inside the enclosures, RG 58, for ship’s cabling RG 213 / U, see cabling diagrams). The network is a 10 Mbit network with Thin Ethernet wiring. Y-plugs are delivered instead of the T-plugs formerly used. The BNC Y-plugs must be connected directly into the Ethernet module. It is not admissible to connect the Y-plug and the network adapter by means of a coaxial cable. The proper termination with a 50 Ω BNC-termination plug at both ends of the Ethernet line is very important. It is not permissible to use cable with a characteristic impedance different from 50 Ω.

T

ztr1_071.eps

No settings or adjustments have to be made on the Ethernet module.

Fig. 4-14 Principle of wiring for LAN Network

NOTE: If the Ethernet module is not used, it must be removed from the electronics unit. It must be replaced by a slot cover with the order No. 5582688.

62

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

4 Functional Description

Technical Manual

4.5 Display Electronics Unit

Interconnection Units RG58

RG213

RG58

RG213

RG58

RG213

RG58

RG213

T

ztr1_161.eps

T

Figure 4-15 shows the various TRACKPILOT Electronics Units or possibilities for connecting the LAN RADAR/MULTIPILOT/CHARTPILOT Electronics Units Ethernet. It is not admissible to connect RG213/U coaxial cable directly to the Ethernet module. The cabling has to be converted into RG58C/U by means of the adapter bracket in the interconnection unit and the RG58C/U coaxial cable which must be used between the adapter bracket and the Y-plug on the LAN network adapter pcb. Direct wiring with RG58C/U cable is possible if the cables are routed inside the console housings.

Fig. 4-15 LAN Ethernet wiring of a quadruple system

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

63

4 Functional Description

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

4.5 Display Electronics Unit

Technical Manual

4.5.9

Interconnection Box VS3034G030 The Interconnection Box provides the terminals for the connection of the ship’s cables and for the internal wiring to components of the Display Electronics Unit.

zt1r_016.jpg

The Interconnection Box contains also components for power supply and the system’s power switch. The pcb GE3044G216 offers four interfaces which can be adapted to 20 mA current loop (TTY), TTL, RS422 or RS232 by means of plug-in pcbs. If the Interconnection Box is mounted below the Display Electronics Unit. The optional RGB Buffer and Analog Interface can be mounted in the InterInterconnection Box with RGB Buffer and Analog Interface connection Box. Suitable bolts are provided. The main signals which are connected via the Interconnection Box are: -

4.5.9.1

TVA video (TVA1 in and TVA2 in) TVA1 out (remote video) Serial interfaces (ship’s sensors, AIS) 2 CAN buses Alarm signals (input and acknowledge) Mains supply Power on/off switch signals

Connectors and Terminals of the Interconnection Box

J3 RGB OUT

J4 RGB OUT

J5 RGB OUT

zt1r_081.jpg

J2 RGB IN

RGB Buffer connectors, see Section 4.5.13

J4, TVA to RDC

Fig. 4-16

64

J3, monitor OSD data J2, monitor OSD data to display el. unit to monitor

J1, sensor signals to RDC

Connectors at the rear of the Interconnection Box

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

4 Functional Description

Technical Manual

4.5 Display Electronics Unit

4.5.9.2

Interconnection Board GE3044G216

TB2 Function

TB 2, Alarm Contacts

TB3

19 = TB3/5 18 = TB3/5 17 = TB3/5 Double End Ferry: 15, 16 closed = AFT 15, 16 opened = FWD Audio Alarm Ack.: 14 Alarm Ack. M 13 Alarm Ack. P Chart Alarm: 12 AL_out4 make 11 AL_out4 centre 10 AL_out4 break Target Alarm: (ARPA/AIS Alarm) 9 AL_out3 make 8 AL_out3 centre 7 AL_out3 break Dead Man Alarm Trig: 6 AL_out2 make 5 AL_out2 centre 4 AL_out2 break Radar Alarm: 3 AL_out1 make 2 AL_out1 centre 1 AL_out1 break

The alarm contacts are provided by the RDC. See the RDC description for technical data and configuration.

15 24V ON/OFF ONN 14 24V ON/OFF ONP 13 24V ON/OFF ONN 12 24V ON/OFF ONP 11 CAN0_A (IN) 10 CAN0_B (IN) 9 CAN1_A (IN) 8 CAN1_B (IN) 7 CAN0_A (OUT) 6 CAN0_B (OUT) 5 CAN_GND 4 CAN1_A (OUT) 3 CAN1_B (OUT) 2 24V ON/OFF ONN 1 24V ON/OFF ONP IN and OUT for the CAN-Bus are identical.

TB18 Function For Remote Keyboard Electronics 6 CAN_KBC GND 5 CAN_KBC GND 4 CAN_KBC B Out -> 3 CAN_KBC A Out -> 2 CAN_KBC B in System Layout Local Indicator Number (this one)

Shows the Indicator (number) of the operated Indicator. The Indicator number must be set by means of S1 on the RDC (see Section 4.5.4 from page 53 onwards).

Indicator > Indicator 1... 5

Select Not Connected (default) / RADARPILOT 1100 or MULTIPILOT 1100 Defines the type of Indicator. If MULTIPILOT 1100 is selected, the ECDIS menu is available for this Indicator.

Transceiver > Transceiver 1 ... 5 Interswitch (PCI)

Select Connected or Not Connected (default). Select Connected or Not Connected (default). If more than two Indicators or Transceivers are connected in a system, the Interswitch is needed to switch the TVA signals.

Sensor Interface > Sensor Interface 1 ... 2

NACOS Configuration

Select Connected or Not Connected (default). Sensor interfaces are the - Analog Interface (Gyro/Log Interface) for the connection of an analog gyro, an analog log and an AIS, the - COM Expander with 5 serial interfaces. NOTE: If "Not Connected" has been selected, it is not permissible to connect an Analog Interface. This can cause problems on the CAN bus. (not for standard radar systems)

> TRACKPILOT

Select Connected or Not Connected (default). Defines whether a TRACKPILOT is connected to the system.

> ENGINE INTERFACE

Select Connected, Connected or Not Connected (default). Defines whether an ENGINE INTERFACE is connected to the system.

This is the NACOS Backup System 2

Select No (default) or Yes In case of a redundant TRACKPILOT in the system, the system must be divided in two subsystems. This parameter should be set to Yes only, after consulting the manufacturer.

Ethernet LAN

Select One Net (default) or Two Sub-nets In case of a redundant TRACKPILOT in the system, the system must be divided in two subsystems, or alternatively, the Ethernet LAN can be divided in two sub-nets. This parameter should be set to Two Sub-nets only, after consulting the manufacturer.

Planning System

114

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

5.11 Configure Menu

System Layout ( cont. ) Configure > System Layout > Connected Planning System

5.11.6

Select No/1/2/3 or more than 3 Select No for standard radar systems. RADARPILOT: Defines whether one or more CHARTPILOT 1100 or MULTIPILOT 1100 are connected as a planning system. User Chart Objects which have been defined at a CHARTPILOT or MULTIPILOT can be displayed in the radar PPI or the radar can be licensed as a CHARTRADAR. MULTIPILOT: If no CHARTPILOT is connected, it is not possible to perform the installation, update and licensing of charts.

AIS

Select Not Connected (default)/Connected to Sensor Interface or Connected to LAN Defines whether an AIS is connected to the system and if it is connected via LAN or to a sensor interface.

VDR

Select Not connected (default) or connected to DEBEG 4300. Defines whether the radar supplies a VDR DEBEG 4300 with data via Ethernet LAN.

System / Ship Parameters By means of this menu, the basic data of the ship and of the system can be entered. System / Ship Parameters Configure > System / Ship Parameters Ship Data > Administration

Common ship data. Enter comments and names for: - Vessel (must be set if an AIS is connected) - Shipping Company - Flag - Call Sign (must be set if an AIS is connected) - Phone - Fax Ship Data for AIS: (values must be set!) - MMSI Number Maritime Mobile Service Identity Number for the Automatic Identification System (AIS) (default = 0) - IMO Number IMO Number used for the Automatic Identification System (AIS) (default = 0) - Type of Ship Select Not defined/Passenger Ship/Cargo Ship/Tanker/ High Speed Craft/Pilot Vessel/SAR Vessel/Tug/Port Tender/ Anti-Pollution Vessel/Law Enforcement Vessel/ Medical Transports/Fishing Vessel/Towing Vessel/ Sailing Vessel/Pleasure Craft/WIG or Only Coded as Number Sets the type of ship which is transmitted by the AIS. - Type of Ship Coded as Number Sets the type of ship coded as a number for the AIS The parameters Type of Ship and Type of Ship Coded as Number are coupled with each other. If a type of ship has been selected, the corresponding number is set automatically.

> System Position and other Ship Dimensions

The system position defines a coordinate origin for the position calculation (normally the location of the DOLOG transducer). These values are also very important if an AIS is connected.

> Distance to Bow

Set a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0 m).

> Distance to Stern

Set a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0 m).

> Distance to SB

Set a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0 m).

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

115

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

Technical Manual

5.11 Configure Menu

System / Ship Parameters (cont. ) Configure > System / Ship Parameters

116

> Distance to P

Set a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0 m).

> Length at Waterline

Set a value in 0.1 m steps The parameter specifies the ship’s length between the perpendiculars for squat calculation.

> Nominal Speed

Set a value in 0.1 kt steps (default = 20.0 kt). Parameter used for trial manoeuvres.

> Acceleration

Set a value in 0.005 m/s² steps (default is 0.020 m/s²). Parameter used for trial manoeuvres.

> Maximum ROT Alarm Limit

Set a value in 1 °/min steps (default is 0 °/min = no check). The ROT sensor (gyro) is checked against this limit.

> Position Quality Check

Select Off (default) / Standard Quality / Medium Quality or Low Quality. The position sensor is checked against unexpected differences between the position values.

> Minimum Radius

Set a value in 0.01 NM steps in the range of 0.03 NM...1.00 NM (default is 0.25 NM). Specifies the smallest radius with which manoeuvres can be performed.

> Maximum Radius

Set a value in 0.01 NM steps in the range of 1.00 NM...3.00 NM (default is 2.00 NM). Specifies the smallest radius with which manoeuvres can be performed.

> Gyro Monitoring

Defines the maximum values for the Gyro Monitoring functions which can be set by the operator (SENSOR MONITOR).

> On/Off

The following menu items appear only if On is selected.

> Gyro against Magnetic Compass

Set a value in 1° steps (default = 0° = Off). Gyro monitoring against the magnetic compass (HDG/MAG).

> Gyro against COG of Main Position Sensor

Set a value in 1° steps (default = 0° = Off). Gyro monitoring against the course over ground of the main position sensor. A difference between the gyro value and the course over ground can be caused by a compass failure or by a drift (HDG/ COG).

> Gyro against COG of Redundant Position Sensor

Set a value in 1° steps (default = 0° = Off). Gyro monitoring against the course over ground of the redundant position sensor. A difference between the gyro value and the course over ground can be caused by a compass failure or by a drift (HDG/COG).

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

5.11 Configure Menu

System / Ship Parameters (cont.) Configure > System / Ship Parameters > Ignore Gyro against COG above ROT of:

Set a value in 1°/min steps (default = 0°/min = Off). Ignore the difference between gyro and COG above a rate of turn of this value. If the ROT value is large, the COG of the position sensor usually lags behind the heading of the gyro which causes an increase in the difference. This parameter has an effect on the parameters Gyro against COG of Main Position Sensor and Gyro against COG of Redundant Position Sensor.

Factor Heading/ COG 1.0

1 = actual ROT for the example 2 = value of parameter Ignore Gyro against COG above ROT of

1

2

ROT

Example: ROT 1 = 30°/min, ROT 2 = 120°/min, Difference Gyro/COG = 10°, limit HDG/COG set by operator = 5° - ROT 30°/min: Factor = 0.75 -> 10.0°x0.75 = 7.5, alarm triggered If a value for the parameter Ignore Gyro against COG below Speed of is set, the result is additionally multiplied with the factor of that parameter. > Ignore Gyro against COG below Speed of

Set a value in 1 kt steps (default = 0 kt = Off). Ignore the difference between gyro and COG below a speed of this value. If the speed is reduced, an increasing difference between the gyro value and the course over ground can be caused by a drift. This parameter has an effect on the parameters Gyro against COG of Main Position Sensor and Gyro against COG of Redundant Position Sensor

1 = value of parameter Ignore Gyro against COG below Speed of

Factor Heading/ COG 1.0

2 = value of parameter Full Sensitivity Gyro against COG above Speed of 1

2

Speed

Below the speed "1", the difference between gyro and COG is ignored. A factor is calculated for speed values between "1" and "2". The difference between gyro and COG is multiplied by this factor. Example: Speed 1 = 5 kt, Speed 2 = 20 kt (Nominal Speed) Difference Gyro/COG = 10°, limit HDG/COG set by operator = 5° - Speed 20 kt: Factor = 1.0 -> 10.0°x1.0 = 10.0, alarm triggered - Speed 5 kt: Factor = 0.25 -> 10.0°x0.25 = 2.5, no alarm triggered - Speed 4 kt: Factor = 0 -> 10.0°x0.0 = 0, no alarm triggered If a value for the parameter Ignore Gyro against COG above ROT of is set, the result is additionally multiplied with the factor of that parameter. > Full Sensitivity Gyro against COG above speed of > Speed Monitoring

This parameter is the value "Speed 2" which is shown in the diagram above. Usually, the nominal speed of the ship should be set. Defines the maximum values for the Speed Monitoring functions which can be set by the operator (SENSOR MONITOR).

> On/Off

On should be selected only if this has been suggested by the manufacturer’s development or service division. The following menu items appear only if On is selected.

> Speed against Redundant Speed Sensor

Set a value in 1 kt steps (default = 0 kt = Off). Speed monitoring against the speed of the redundant speed sensor (SPD/...LOGx).

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

117

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

Technical Manual

5.11 Configure Menu

System / Ship Parameters (cont. ) Configure > System / Ship Parameters > Speed against SOG of Main Position Sensor

Set a value in 1 kt steps (default = 0 kt = Off). Speed monitoring against the speed over ground measured by the main position sensor (SPD/SOG).

> Speed against SOG of Redundant Position Sensor

Set a value in 1 kt steps (default = 0 kt = Off). Speed monitoring against the speed over ground measured by the redundant position sensor (SPD/SOG).

> Position Monitoring

Defines the maximum values for the Position Monitoring functions which can be set by the operator (SENSOR MONITOR).

> On/Off

On should be selected only if this has been suggested by the manufacturer’s development or service division. The following menu items appear only if On is selected. The following menu item appears only if On is selected.

> Position against Redundant Position Sensor

Set a value in 1 m steps (default = 0 m = Off). Position monitoring against the position measured by the redundant position sensor (POS).

> Additional Alarms Setup Menu

Select No or Yes (default = No) Enables the operators menu Alarms > Settings. By means of this menu the alarms POSITION STATUS CHANGED, LOG STATUS CHANGED and BRIDGE ALARM SYSTEM can be deactivated.

Basic Radar > Video Anti Clutter Sea

Select On or Off (default = On). This parameter is valid for all radars in the configuration.

> ARPA Lost Target without Alarm

Set a value in 0.1 NM steps in the range 10.0...20.0 NM (default = 19.5 NM) If an ARPA target is lost out of this range, no alarm is triggered off.

> AIS Lost Target without Alarm

Set a value in 0.1 NM steps in the range 10.0...99.0 NM (default = 16.0 NM) If an AIS target is lost out of this range, no alarm is triggered off.

TB2 Terminal 15/16 HM Turn

Select None (default) or Turn Headmarker by 180 deg Turns the Headmarker by 180° caused by an external contact on TB2/15, 16 on the Interconnection Board (used for double end ferries).

TB2 Terminal 15/16 HM Turn

Select Not connected (default) / Double End Ferry, HM Turn For double end ferries, an external contact at TB2/15,16 determines whether the AFT or FWD bridge is activated. The following parameters are visible only, when Double End Ferry, HM Turn has been set.

FWD Bridge is active String

A text string can be entered which is displayed for the operator, when the FWD bridge has been activated.

AFT Bridge is active String

A text string can be entered which is displayed for the operator, when the AFT bridge has been activated.

Startup Sensor Selection

118

Defines with which sensors the system works after a startup.

> Heading

Select Manual Heading or Heading Sensor 1 (default). The use of manual heading is not permissible. This setting may only be used for special purposes, such as exhibitions.

> Speed

Select Manual Speed / Position Sensor 1 /.../ Position Sensor 6 / Log 1 (default) or Log 2

> Position

Select Estimated Position / Position Sensor 1 (default) /.../ Position Sensor 6.

> Time

Select Time from Internal Clock / Time from Position Sensor 1 (default) /.../ Time from Position Sensor 6 / Time Sensor 1 or Time Sensor 2. The ZDA message of the NMEA definitions is used to transfer the data.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

5.11 Configure Menu

System / Ship Parameters (cont.) Configure > System / Ship Parameters > Time from Selected Position Sensor

Select Yes (default) or No. The setting "Yes" overwrites the setting of the parameter Time from Internal Clock. The time of the currently selected position sensor is used if "Yes" is selected.

> Differentiated Heading

From Selected Heading Sensor is the only available choice. ROT calculated by differentiation of the heading.

> Default Depth

Select Manual Depth / Depth Sensor 1 (default).

> Default Wind

Select Manual Wind / Wind Sensor 1 (default).

> Default Weather

Select Manual Weather / Weather Sensor 1 (default).

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

119

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

Technical Manual

5.11 Configure Menu

5.11.7

Radar Via the Radar menus, the Transceivers and the Display Electronics Units can be configured. NOTE: To avoid mistakes caused by different parameter settings originating from various Display Electronics Units, the entire system must be parameterized at one and the same Display Electronics Unit. Afterwards, all parameters must be copied by means of the Config Transfer function or by means of a diskette to the other radars or MULTIPILOTs. Restart all Display Electronics Units before changing any parameters at other Display Electronics Units. NOTE: In the menus, the CHARTRADAR 1100 and the MULTIPILOT 1100 are often not mentioned explicitly. The settings are the same as for the RADARPILOT 1100, except for the menus which are intended especially for the CHARTRADAR 1100 or MULTIPILOT 1100.

5.11.7.1

Configuration of the Indicators (Administration)

Admini stration Configure > Radar > Indicator > Indicator 1...5 > Administration Installed Type of Tracking Facility

Select ARPA or EPA (default). EPA = Electronic Plotting Aid ARPA = Automatic Radar Plotting Aid If no ARPA hardware is installed and the parameter is set to "ARPA", the systems works as an EPA system. The MULTIPILOT is always an ARPA system.

Connected Monitor

Select Other Types (default) or select the type of monitor that is connected to the Electronics Unit from the list.

Keyboard

Select Trackball only (default) / RADAR Keyboard or RADAR + TRACKPILOT Keyboard.

Name

Name of Indicator; enter by virtual keyboard or by ASCII keyboard.

Alarm Relays Activation Delay

Enter a value in 1 s steps (default = 30 s), range = 1 s...120 s Sets the delay for the activation of the alarm relays.

System Fault Alarm

120

Select Disable (default) or Enable. Specifies that the external alarm must be triggered if any system fault occurs.

Dangerous Target Alarm

Select Disable (default) or Enable. Specifies that the external alarm must be triggered if a dangerous target has been detected, i.e. if the CPA value and the TCPA value are less than the set values.

Lost Target Alarm

Select Disabled (default) / Enabled. Specifies that the external alarm has to be triggered when a tracked target is lost.

Guard Zone Alarm

Select Disable (default) or Enable. Specifies that an external alarm must be triggered when a target has been detected in the guard zone.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

Technical Manual

5.11 Configure Menu

Admi nistrati on (cont .) Configure > Radar > Indicator > Indicator 1...5 > Administration Allowed to be Sensor Master

Select Yes or No (default). An Indicator can become Sensor Master if the sensors - Gyro - Log - Position are connected to the RDC of this Indicator, the Analog Interface (GE3044G207) or the COM Expander. If these three sensors are connected in redundancy to a second Indicator, this second Indicator has to be parameterized as sensor master, too. When such a system is started, the Indicator which becomes operable first is determined to be sensor master. In the case of a defect of the sensor master, the second Indicator becomes the sensor master automatically.

CHARTRADAR/MULTIPILOT Function

Select Available or Not Available (default). For a RADARPILOT 1100 this parameter defines whether the radar can be operated as a CHARTRADAR 1100 with a display of electronic seacharts in the PPI. The User Chart Objects of a connected CHARTPILOT or MULTIPILOT can be displayed without activating the CHARTRADAR functionalities. For a MULTIPILOT 1100, this parameter must be set to activate the full ECDIS functionality.

CHARTRADAR/MULTIPILOT Identification Code

Displays the Unique Identification Code of this CHARTRADAR 1100 or MULTIPILOT 1100 unit. Modifications of this number cannot be saved. The number is used to generate the CHART Function License Key. See Section 5.2 and Section 5.3 for further information about the procedure.

CHART Function License Key

If the correct license key has been entered here, the chart/ECDIS functionalities can be used at this Indicator. If no valid key is available, the access to the chart/ECDIS database is locked. See Section 5.2 and Section 5.3 for further information about the procedure.

Conning

Select Available or Not Available (default). This parameter defines whether the Conning Display is available or not. This parameter is available at CHARTRADARs or MULTIPILOTS only. If the CHART Function License Key is not valid, the Conning functions are not available.

Based on Specification

Select IEC 60936-1 (default) or IEC 60936-3. The approval is based on the IEC specification. If IEC 60936-3 is selected, the chart cannot be displayed in Head-Up mode and the chart areas are always filled.

Radar PPI Radius

Select Use Default (default) / Standard or Maximize. Always select Use Default. Standard or Maximize should be selected only if this has been suggested by the manufacturer’s development or service division. "Maximize" enlarges the size of the PPI display to fulfil the 16" radar type approval requirements with the Monitor AZ 3063. "Standard" shows the PPI in the standard size (which is smaller than 16" with the Monitor AZ 3063). When "Use Default" is selected, the suitable setting is chosen automatically, corresponding to the monitor setting Connected Monitor. If a TFT monitor which requires the maximized display is used together with CRT monitors, it is possible to configure these CRT monitors with "Maximize" to get the same display as on the TFT monitor.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

121

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

5.11 Configure Menu

Admini stration (cont.) Configure > Radar > Indicator > Indicator 1...5 > Administration Monitor Aspect Ratio

Select Use Default / 4/3 or 5/4. Select Use Default always. Standard or Maximize should be selected only if this has been suggested by the manufacturer’s development or service division. Monitor resolutions of 1600x1200 or 1024x768 have an aspect ratio of 4/3. A resolution of 1280x1024 has an aspect ratio of 5/4. CRT Monitors can display resolutions with both aspect ratios, although the CRT’s own aspect ratio is usually 4/3. Consequently, if a CRT Monitor is driven with the resolution of 1280x1024, not the complete size of the CRT is used and a blank band appears. This can be corrected by adjusting the screen size settings. As a result of this "compression" from 5/4 to 4/3, circular objects on the screen appear slightly oval. TFT Monitors must be driven with their own 4/3 aspect ratio. When "Use Default" is selected, the suitable setting is chosen automatically, corresponding to the Monitor setting Connected Monitor. In case of the Monitor AZ 3063, the resolution which must be selected with 1280x1024 by means of the DIP switches on the RDC is automatically processed to a resolution of 1280x960 which corresponds to an aspect ratio of 4/3.

122

Head-Up PPI Orientation

Select Bow-up (standard) or Stern-up. Bow-up is the default setting. The stern-up PPI orientation should be used if the radar monitor is installed the other way round, so that the operator is watching in the direction of a stern window.

Monitor Control Interface

Select Indicator (COM 1) (default) or RKE (J2). When a Remote Keyboard Electronics is used, the serial interface of the monitor can be connected to the RKE or to COM 1 of the Indicator. The interface which is used must be selected.

Transfer of ARPA Alarms to CHARTPILOT

Select Yes or No (default). Defines whether ARPA alarms like Lost Target and Dangerous Target are displayed at connected CHARTPILOTs. The alarms cannot be acknowledged at a CHARTPILOT.

Central Dimming Adjustment

Select No (default)/Yes/User Controlled No: Dimming must be set at every single Indicator. Yes: Modifications of the dimming settings at one Indicator are transferred to all other Indicators and they are set if the central dimming function is enabled at these Indicators. User Controlled: An additional button is displayed in the Brilliance menus. By means of this button, the Operator can enable or disable the central dimming function for the Indicator.

Double End Ferry

Select No (default)/Yes, FWD Bridge Indicator/Yes, AFT Bridge Indicator/Yes, only one Bridge (at Centre) Defines to which bridge the Indicator belongs (on double end ferries).

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

Technical Manual

5.11.7.2

5.11 Configure Menu

Configuration of the Indicator’s Serial Interfaces (Serial Interfaces)

Serial Interfaces > Seri al I/ O 1.. .4 Configure > Radar > Indicator > Indicator 1...5 > Serial Interfaces > Serial I/O 1...4 Driver

Select None (default) / NMEA183 (IEC 61162-1/2) / C. Plath (serial Gyro) / Anschuetz (serial Gyro). Sets the driver for the UART. The following items depend on the driver which has been chosen.

Settings for NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1/2): > Baud Rate

Select 4800 (default) / 9600 / 19200 / 38400. Sets the baud rate for the UART. 9600 and 19200 are not NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1) conformal.

> Serial Gyro > Serial Gyro

Select Connected or Not Connected (default). Defines whether a gyro using the NMEA message HDT is connected.

> Channel of this Gyro

Heading Sensor 1 is the only available choice.

> Display Selected Gyro

Select Yes or No (default) Set to Yes if two or more gyros (for example via a switch-over unit) are connected to the radar system. If a NMEA message (for example, PPNSD) is received, the identifier of the active gyro is displayed.

> Position > Position

Select Connected or Not Connected (default). Defines whether a position sensor using the NMEA messages GLL, GGA, VTG and ZDA is connected. The following items appear only if Position has been defined as Connected.

> Channel

Select 1 /.../ 6 (default = 1). Channel (multiplexer) identification.

> Distance Longitudinal

Enter a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m). Position sensor antenna, position distance (longitudinal) in m relative to the system position.

> Distance Transversal

Enter a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m). Position sensor antenna, position distance (transversal) in m relative to the system position.

> Sensor Number

Select None, 1 /.../ 6 (default = None). Specifies whether, in the display of the radar system, the sensor must be supplemented by a serial number, and if so, which number. The position sensor name used in the menus and displays is derived from the talker identifier of the IEC 61162 signal transferred from the position sensor. If there are several navigation sensors of the same type connected (e.g. two GPS systems), the operator must be able to distinguish between them in the sensor selection and in the status display. With the aid of the sensor number function, it can be arranged, for example, that one GPS system is consistently called "GPS 1" and the other is consistently called "GPS 2".

> GLL, GGA Selection

Select Position from GLL message (default) or Position from GGA message. Specifies whether the position is taken from the GGA or from the GLL message.

> Use Speed from Position Sensor

Select Yes or No (default). The NMEA message VTG of the position sensor is used as the speed sensor. Set to No for BSH or DNV-W1.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

123

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

5.11 Configure Menu

Serial I nterfaces > Serial I /O 1. ..4 (cont. ) Configure > Radar > Indicator > Indicator 1...5 > Serial Interfaces > Serial I/O 1...4 > Use Time from Position Sensor

Select Yes or No (default). The NMEA message ZDA of the position sensor is used as the time sensor.

> Speed > Speed

Select Connected or Not Connected (default). Defines whether a speed sensor using the NMEA messages VBW, VHW is connected. The following items appear only if Speed has been defined as Connected.

> Channel

Select Log 1 (default) or Log 2.

> Distance Longitudinal

Enter a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m). Sensor (speed log transducer) position distance (longitudinal) relative to system position.

> Distance Transversal

Enter a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m). Sensor (speed log transducer) position distance (transversal) relative to system position.

> Log Type

Select 1 Axis Log (default) or 2 Axis Log.

> Longitudinal Speed Filter Constant

Enter a value in the range 1...10 (default = 1). Filter X Constant.

> Transversal Speed Filter Constant

Enter a value in the range 1...10 (default = 1). Filter Y Constant.

> Time > Time

Select Connected or Not Connected (default). Defines whether a time sensor using NMEA message ZDA is connected. The following item appears only if Time has been defined as Connected:

> Channel

Select Time Sensor 1 (default) or Time Sensor 2.

> Output > Output GLL

Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output DTM

Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output VTG

Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output HDT

Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output TTM

Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output OSD

Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output MWV

Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Wind Reference

124

The following parameters set the repetition time of the output messages.

Select True North or Relative

> Output ZDA

Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output RSD

Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output DBT

Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output ROT

Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output MWD

Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output VBW

Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output MHU

Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output MMB

Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output MTA

Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

Technical Manual

5.11 Configure Menu

Seri al Interfaces > Seri al I/ O 1.. .4 (cont.) Configure > Radar > Indicator > Indicator 1...5 > Serial Interfaces > Serial I/O 1...4 > Output RTE/WPL

Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> RTE Mode

Select: Working Route (default) or Complete Route Working Route: the last waypoint and the following 4 waypoints are transmitted. Complete Route: the complete route with all waypoints is transmitted.

> WPL Remark

Select: No Remark (default) or Append Remark No Remark: the remarks of a waypoint are not transmitted. Append Remark: the remarks of the waypoint are transmitted.

> RTE Message Route Identifier

Select: With Track Number (default) or Track Number 0000 With Track Number: the original number of the system track is transmitted. Track Number 0000: the system track is always transmitted with the number 0000.

> Output MTW

Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Serial Output used as

Select Not Defined (default) / NMEA 0183 Ser. Output (IEC 611621/2) / AIS Navigation Data. Defines the type of the serial output.

> Depth

Select Connected or Not Connected (default). The following items appear only if Depth has been defined as Connected:

> Depth Sensor 1

Depth Sensor 1 is the only available choice.

> Depth Value

Select Below Transducer (default) or Below Keel Below Keel must be used only if the telegrams xxDPT, PSKPDPT or PELACSDS are received. Otherwise use Below Transducer.

> Wind > Channel > Weather > Channel > Route

Select Connected or Not Connected (default). Wind Sensor 1 is the only available choice. Select Connected or Not Connected (default). Weather Sensor 1 is the only available choice. Select Connected or Not Connected (default). Defines whether a system is connected which transmits tracks via NMEA protocol, e.g. a GPS system. Set to Not connected if a CHARTPILOT is connected to the system. The following items appear only if Route has been defined as Connected:

> Channel

Select Route Sensor 1/.../Route Sensor 4

> Catalog

The catalog name for the tracks of the route sensor must be entered in this input field. The name will be used by the operator. It is advisable to enter the name of the sensor, for example GPS 1.

> TRACKPILOT Track Mode

Select Disable or Enable If it is sure that the quality of the route data of this sensor is satisfactory, it can be admitted for use as a track for the TRACKPILOT.

Settings for C. Plath and Anschuetz: > Channel of this Gyro > Display Selected Gyro

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

Heading Sensor 1 is the only available choice. Select Yes or No (default) Set to Yes if two or more gyros (for example, via a switch over unit) are connected to the radar system.

125

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

Technical Manual

5.11 Configure Menu

5.11.7.3

Configuration of the Transceivers

When a Transceiver has been selected, it may happen that it takes a few seconds until the TCU parameters have been loaded. A message appears which shows the progress of loading data. If the Indicator does not make contact with the TCU of the selected Transceiver, a warning appears. In this case, the parameters shown in the menu do not correspond to the parameters which are actually set in the TCU. Transceiver > Transceiver 1.. .5 Configure > Radar > Transceiver > Transceiver 1...5 Type of Generation

Select RADAR 1100 S-Band / RADAR 1100 X-Band 12.5 kW / RADAR 1100 X-Band 25 kW

For 1000 Series Transceiver: > Additional Information

Click into the data field and enter any comments.

> Frequency Deviation

Enter a value for the constant PRF deviation in the range -5% to 5% (default = 0). This parameter changes the PRF to reduce the mutual influence (interference) between several radars on the ship.

> Sector Blanking

(See form sheet on page 305)

> Number of Blanking Sectors

Select None / 1 /.../4. The following two menu items appear only if at least one Blanking Sector has been set. Each Blanking Sector has its own Start and Stop Angle. Not allowed for the main navigation radar.

> Blanking Sector X Start Angle

Start angle of the Blanking Sector X.

> Blanking Sector X Stop Angle

Stop Angle of the Blanking Sector X.

> Antenna

126

> Speed Capability

Select None / Single (Low Speed) / Dual (default) or Single (High Speed). Set to Single (High Speed) on HSC.

> Distance Longitudinal

Enter the distance in metres in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m). Distance between the installation location of the radar Scanner and the system position along the ship’s longitudinal axis. + = Scanner is situated between bow and system position.

> Distance Transversal

Enter the distance in metres in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m). Distance between the installation position of the radar Scanner and the system position along the ship’s transverse axis. + = Scanner is situated between the starboard side and the system position.

> Height above Sea Level

Enter the height of the antenna above the sea level in metres, in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m)

> Beam Width

Antenna Beam Width at the 3 dB points. Default for X-Band = 1.2°, S-Band = 1.8°. 3 dB points: 5 ft X-Band Scanner:1.5° 8 ft X-Band Scanner:1.0° 14 ft S-Band Scanner:1.8°

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

5.11 Configure Menu

Transcei ver > Transceiver 1. .. 5 (cont .) Configure > Radar > Transceiver > Transceiver 1...5 > Azimuth Pulses per Revolution

X-Band 1. Pulser HEDS-5605 at the intermediate shaft = 1920.0, 2. Modification Kit GR3017G027 with slotted wheel at the intermediate shaft = 540.0 3. Combined Azimuth / Headmarker Pulse Generator with slotted wheel at the hollow shaft = 72.0 S-Band 1. Old pulser (34 teeth chopper wheel) = 830.0 2. New pulser (17 teeth chopper wheel) = 415 See the description of the different azimuth pulse generators in the technical manual of the Gearboxes/Transceivers for further information.

> Antenna Motor Frequency > Last Modification Date

5.11.8

Select 50 Hz or 60 Hz (default). Displays the date of the last modification of the Transceiver adjustments.

Sensor Interfaces (Additional Interfaces via Analog Interface / COM Expander) By means of the Sensor Interface menu, the optional Analog Interface or the COM Expander can be configured. The interfaces can only be parameterized if they have been configured in the system layout. Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Interface 1.. .2 Configure > Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Interface 1...2 Sensor Interface 1...2

Click on Sensor Interface 1 or Sensor Interface 2 to configure the sensor interface as Analog Interface (Gyro/Log Interface), Interface Expander or COM Expander. If the system is equipped with an Interface Expander and an Analog Interface, the Interface Expander must become the Sensor Interface 1 (the Interface Expander must be the master, because it offers additional serial interfaces). The following menu items Gyro and Pulse Log are available for the Analog Interface and the Interface Expander only.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

127

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

Technical Manual

5.11 Configure Menu

5.11.8.1

Gyro and Pulse Log Interfaces of the Analog Interface

Sensor Int erfaces > Sensor Interface 1.. .2 Gyro and Pulse Log Interface of the Analog Interface Gyro > Heading Sensor Channel

Heading Sensor 1 is the only available choice.

> Analog Gyro System

Select No Analog Gyro Connected (default) / DC Stepper Positive / DC Stepper Negative / DC Positive Halfwave / DC Negative Halfwave / AC Gyro. DC Stepper: The heading signal is transferred by means of a stepper and the signal voltage is a smoothed DC voltage. See Figure 4-20 on page 71 and the description of the LEDs DS 33, 34, 35 in Section 4.5.10. Halfwave: The heading signal is transferred by means of a stepper and the signal is an unfiltered DC voltage, generated from the 50 Hz or 60 Hz supply voltage. AC Gyro: Input indicating that the signal is transferred by means of a synchro.

> Increment

Select 1/6 deg Step (default) / 1/3 deg Step / 1/48 deg Step / 2/3 deg Step (not type-approved). Matching the gyro interface of the Analog Interface to the transmission ratio (resolution): 1/6 degree Step: - Stepper: 1 step corresponds to 1/6 degree course change. - Synchro: 360 degree synchro revolution corresponds to 1 degree course change. 1/3 degree Step: - Stepper: 1 step corresponds to 1/3 degree course change. - Synchro: 360 degree synchro revolution corresponds to 2 degree course change. 1/48 degree Step: - Stepper: 1 step corresponds to 1/48 degree course change. 2/3 degree Step (not approved): - Stepper: 1 step corresponds to 2/3 degree course change. - Synchro: 360 degree synchro revolution corresponds to 4 degree course change (90:1). Setting the compass ratio input to 90:1 will result in degradation of stabilization smoothness and accuracy. Therefore, this setting should not be used where: - the radar installation is intended to meet the IMO/IEC Radar Performance Standards - type approval certification is required - the ARPA option is fitted.

> Reference

Select Not Connected (default) / 50 Hz / 60 Hz. Not Connected must be selected if REF1 and REF2 are not connected to the Analog Interface.

> Gyro Input Voltage

Select Low (default) or High Sets the gyro input voltage (exciter voltage of the stepper or maximum stator voltage of the synchro signal). Always select the "Low" setting. Set to "High" only if it is not possible to get rid of appearing phase errors. After being set to high, the gyro must be tested properly while turning.

> Error Input

Select Not Connected (default) / Connected / Inverted Input. Sets the error input definition.

Pulse Log > Speed Sensor Channel

128

Select Log1 (default) or Log2.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

Technical Manual

5.11 Configure Menu

Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Interface 1.. .2 (cont.) Gyro and Pulse Log Interface of the Analog Interface > Distance Longitudinal

Enter value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m). Position distance (of speed log transducer) (longitudinal) relative to system position.

> Distance Transversal

Enter value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m). Position distance (of speed log transducer) (transversal) relative to system position.

> Sensor Interface Identifier

Select Log (default) / Log 1 / Log 2. Name of the sensor which is being displayed on the screen.

> Log Type

Select No Pulse Log Connected (default) / One Axis Log / Two Axis Log. Sets the log type One Axis Log: Speed in the longitudinal direction only is transferred (e.g. DOLOG 21). Two Axis Log: Speed in longitudinal and transverse direction is transferred (e.g. DOLOG 22 or DOLOG 23).

> Increment

Select 125 Pulses/NM / 200 Pulses/NM (default). Resolution in pulses/NM.

> Error Input

Select Not Connected (default) / Connected / Inverted Input. Sets the error input definition.

> Bottom Track (BT) Input

Select Not Connected (default) / Connected / Inverted Input. Sets the Bottom Track Input definition. Not connected: The BT status signal input is not evaluated. Connected: The BT status input is evaluated. Inverted Input: This function should be selected if - the open contact means that the existing speed signals must be interpreted as bottom track signals and - the closed contact means that the existing speed signals must not be interpreted as bottom track signals. This function should not be selected if - the closed contact means that the existing speed signals must be interpreted as bottom track signals and - the open contact means, that the existing speed signals must not be interpreted as bottom track signals. If both Bottom Track Input and Water Track Input are configured as "not connected", the speed signals are interpreted as water track signals.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

129

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

5.11 Configure Menu

Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Int erface 1.. .2 (cont.) Gyro and Pulse Log Interface of the Analog Interface > Water Track Input (WT)

Select Not Connected (default) / Connected / Inverted Input. Sets the Water Track Input definition. Not connected: The WT status signal input is not evaluated. Connected: The WT status signal input is evaluated. Inverted Input: This function should be selected if - the open contact means that the existing speed signals must be interpreted as water track signals. - the closed contact means that the existing speed signals must not be interpreted as water track signals. This function should not be selected if - the closed contact means that the existing speed signals must be interpreted as water track signals. - the open contact means that the existing speed signals must not be interpreted as water track signals. If both Bottom Track Input and Water Track Input are configured as "not connected", the speed signals are interpreted as water track signals.

> XPM Input

Select Not Connected (default) / Connected / Inverted Input. Sets the XPM Input definition. Specifies whether a sign signal is transferred for the longitudinal speed. - Not connected: No sign signal is transferred for the longitudinal speed. - Connected: Sign signal is transferred. - Inverted Input: Speed ahead corresponds to open contact.

> YPM Input

Select Not Connected (default) / Connected / Inverted Input. Sets the YPM Input definition. Specifies whether a sign signal is transferred for the transverse speed. - Not connected: No sign signal is transferred for the transverse speed. - Connected: Sign signal is transferred. - Inverted Input: Drift to starboard corresponds to open contact.

130

> VX Input

Select Not Connected (default) / Connected / Inverted Input. Sets the VX Input definition, longitudinal speed.

> VY Input

Select Not Connected (default) / Connected / Inverted Input. Sets the VY Input definition, transverse speed.

> Longitudinal Speed Filter Constant

Set a value in the range 1 ... 10 (default = 1). Sets the VX Filter constant. Specifies whether and (if so) how intensely fluctuations of the longitudinal speed signal received from the log are to be smoothed in the Analog Interface (low-pass filter of the 1st order).

> Transversal Speed Filter Constant

Set a value in the range 1 ... 10 (default = 1). Sets the VY Filter constant. Specifies whether and (if so) how intensely fluctuations of the transverse speed signal received from the log are to be smoothed in the Analog Interface (low-pass filter of the 1st order).

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

5.11.8.2

5.11 Configure Menu

Serial Interface of the Analog Interface

Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Interface 1.. .2 Serial Interface of the Analog Interface Serial I/O 1 (for Analog Interface) The following interface types can be parameterized: Driver

Select None (default)/AIS Automatic Ident System or NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1/2).

Settings for AIS > AIS Channel

AIS Sensor 1 is the only available choice.

> Type of AIS

Select DEBEG 3400 (default) or Other.

Settings for NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1/2)

5.11.8.3

> Baud Rate

Select 4800 (default) or 38400.

> Serial Gyro

Select Connected or Not connected (default).

> Channel of this Gyro

Heading Sensor 1 is the only available choice..

> Display Selected Gyro

Select Yes or No (default) Set to Yes if two or more gyros (for example via a switch over unit) are connected to the radar system. If a NMEA message (for example PPNSD) is received, the identifier of the active gyro is displayed.

Serial Interfaces 1...5 of the COM Expander

Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Interface 1.. .2 Serial Interfaces 1...5 of the COM Expander Serial I/O 1...5 The following interface types can be parameterized: Driver

Select None (default) / NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1) /AIS Automatic Identification System / Bridge Alarm System BAS 40P Sets the driver for the UART. The following items depend on the driver which has been chosen. The serial I/O 5 can be used as NMEA interface only.

Settings for NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1) > Baud Rate

Select 4800 (default) / 9600 / 19200 / 38400. Sets the baud rate for the UART. 9600 and 19200 are not NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1) conformant.

> Position > Position

Select Connected or Not Connected (default). Defines whether a position sensor using the NMEA messages GLL, GGA, VTG and ZDA is connected. The following items appear only if Position has been defined as Connected.

> Channel

Select Position Sensor 1 /.../ Position Sensor 6 (default = Position Sensor 1). Channel (multiplexer) identification.

> Distance Longitudinal

Enter a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m). Sensor (position sensor antenna) position distance (longitudinal) in m relative to the system position.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

131

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

5.11 Configure Menu

Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Int erface 1.. .2 Serial Interfaces 1...5 of the COM Expander

(cont.)

> Distance Transversal

Enter a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m). Sensor (position sensor antenna) position distance (transversal) in m relative to the system position.

> Sensor Number

Select None, 1 /.../ 6 (default = None). Specifies whether, in the display of the radar system, the sensor must be supplemented by a serial number and, if so, which number. The position sensor name used in the menus and displays is derived from the talker identifier of the IEC 61162 signal transferred from the position sensor. If there are several navigation sensors of the same type connected (e.g. two GPS systems), the operator must be able to distinguish between them in the sensor selection and in the status display. The sensor number function can be used to arrange, for example, that one GPS system is consistently called "GPS 1" and the other is consistently called "GPS 2".

> GLL, GGA Selection

Select Position from GLL message (default) or Position from GGA message. Specifies whether the position is taken from the GGA or from the GLL message.

> Use Speed from Position Sensor

Select Yes or No (default). The NMEA message VTG of the position sensor is used as the speed sensor. Select No for BSH and DNV W1 ships.

> Use Time from Position Sensor

Select Yes or No (default). The NMEA message ZDA of the position sensor is used as the time sensor.

> Speed > Speed

Select Connected or Not Connected (default). Defines whether a speed sensor using the NMEA messages VBW, VHW is connected. The following items appear only if Speed has been defined as Connected.

> Channel

Select Log 1 (default) or Log 2.

> Distance Longitudinal

Enter a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m). Sensor position distance (longitudinal) relative to system position.

> Distance Transversal

Enter a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m). Sensor position distance (transversal) relative to system position.

> Log Type

Select 1 Axis Log (default) or 2 Axis Log.

> Longitudinal Speed Filter Constant

Enter a value in the range 1...10 (default = 1). Filter X Constant.

> Transversal Speed Filter Constant

Enter a value in the range 1...10 (default = 1). Filter Y Constant.

> Time > Time

Select Connected or Not Connected (default). Defines whether a time sensor using NMEA message ZDA is connected. The following item appears only if Time has been defined as Connected:

> Channel > Output

132

Select Time Sensor 1 (default) or Time Sensor 2. The following parameters set the repetition time of the output messages.

> Output GLL

Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output DTM

Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output VTG

Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

5.11 Configure Menu

Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Interface 1.. .2 Serial Interfaces 1...5 of the COM Expander

(cont.)

> Output HDT

Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output OSD

Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output MWV

Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Wind Reference

Select True North or Relative

> Output ZDA

Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output DBT

Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output ROT

Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output MWD

Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output VBW

Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output MHU

Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output MMB

Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output MTA

Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output MTW

Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Serial Output used as

Select Not Defined (default) / NMEA 0183 Ser. Output (IEC 611621/2) / AIS Navigation Data. Defines the type of the serial output.

Settings for Bridge Alarm System BAS40P:

5.11.9

> Bridge Alarm System Device 1(...3)

Select Connected or Not Connected The following item appears only if the Bridge Alarm System 1 has been defined as Connected.

> BAS Device 1(...3) Identifier

Select a number from 1...31 The identifier usually corresponds to the number of the Bridge Alarm System Device. The Bridge Alarm System Device 1 offers 20 alarm inputs altogether. 5 of them are used for internal purposes. The Bridge Alarm System Devices 2 and 3 offer 20 alarm inputs each.

AIS See Section 5.4 from page 93 on for the connection and configuration of an AIS.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

133

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

5.11 Configure Menu

5.11.10

NACOS

(Not available for standard radar systems)

ztr1_188.gif

The parameters of the TRACKPILOT/ENGINE INTERFACE are stored in the TRACKPILOT Electronics Unit and in the RDC. If one of the components is selected, the radar calls the parameters from the TRACKPILOT electronics unit automatically and compares them with the parameters which are stored in the RDC. If the parameters are different, a dialogue box appears and it must be decided whether the set of parameters from the RDC is to be loaded into the TRACKPILOT or vice versa.

Fig. 5-16

TRACKPILOT configuration manager

The configuration of the TRACKPILOT and ENGINE INTERFACE can be performed in the Configure menus and/or in the Service menus. While performing the setting-to-work, the settings should be performed in the Configure menus. During the use of the Service menus, the PPI is not hidden by any menus and every modification of the parameters performed in the dialogue box affects the TRACKPILOT immediately, and so the Service menus should be used during trials. For a description of the parameters (TRACKPILOT/ENGINE INTERFACE), see the technical manual of the TRACKPILOT.

5.11.11

Planning System

(Not available for standard radar systems) > Select Radar Indicator for CHARTPILOT ARPA targets Select the Indicator from which the CHARTPILOT should get the ARPA targets. > Sensor Information via Ethernet to CHARTPILOT Select True or False (default) Defines whether the sensor information is transferred to the CHARTPILOT via Ethernet.

134

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

5.11 Configure Menu

> C-Map Identifier Displays the C-Map Identifier of the system which has been entered at a connected CHARTPILOT. > ARCS User Permit Number Displays the ARCS User Permit Number of the system which has been entered at a connected CHARTPILOT. > ENC User Permit No. Displays the ENC User Permit Number of the system which has been entered at a connected CHARTPILOT. > Security Unique Identifier (UID) Displays the status information for the UID (UID existing, date and time of storage).

5.11.12

Conning

The Conning functions are available at a CHARTRADAR 1100, MULTIPILOT 1100 or CONNINGPILOT 1100. By means of these parameters, the display of the conning data is configured. To use the Conning functionalities, some settings are necessary at the CHARTPILOT. See the technical manual of the CHARTPILOT 1100 (NACOS xx-5) for further information. The parameters are available only if the parameter Configure > Radar > Indicator > Indicator 1...5 > Administration > Conning has been set to Available. If no correct CHARTRADAR Function Licence Key has been entered, the conning display does not work.

Conning Configure > Conning Shaft Parameters > Number of Shafts

Select None (default)/1 Shaft/2 Shafts The following items appear only if the parameter Number of Shafts has not been defined as None.

> Scale RPM Bar

Select the suitable RPM value (default = 200 RPM) The scaling of the "RPM Bar" is defined by selection of the suitable maximum value.

> Scale Rudder Display

Select 25° (default)/50°/75° The scaling of the "Rudder Display" is defined by selection of the suitable maximum value.

> Number of Clutches

Select None (default)/1 Clutch....6 Clutches Defines the number of clutches.

> Clutch Label

Select Yes or No Defines whether the clutch symbols are shown with a label or not.

> Display Power Bar

Select Yes or No Defines whether the power bar is displayed or not.

> Display Pitch Bar

Select Yes or No Defines whether the pitch bar is displayed or not.

Scale Off Course Bar

Select Auto (default)/5°/15°/30°/50° The scaling of the display "Off Course Deviation Bar" is defined by selection of the suitable maximum value.

Scale Off Track Bar

Select Auto (default)/50 m/100 m/250 m/500 m/1000 m The scaling of the "Off Track Deviation Bar (XTD)" is defined by selection of the suitable maximum value.

Scale Longitudinal Speed Bar

Select 10 kt/15 kt/20 kt/25 kt (default)/30 kt/35 kt/40 kt The scaling of the "Longitudinal Scale Bar" (longitudinal speed) is defined by selection of the suitable maximum value.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

135

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

Technical Manual

5.11 Configure Menu

Conni ng ( cont. ) Configure > Conning Display Power Bar

Select MW Scale (default) or % Scale Scaling of the power bar with % or MW.

Scale Shaft Power Bar

Select 2 MW/5 MW/10 MW/15 MW/20 MW (default)/25 MW/ 30 MW/40 MW/50 MW/100 MW The scaling of the "Shaft Power Bar" is defined by selection of the suitable maximum value.

Generator Parameters Number of Generators

Select None/1 Generator...6 Generators The following item appears depending on the setting of the parameter Number of Generators. If Number of Generators has been set to None, no parameter is available.

> Scale Generator Power Bar

Select 2 MW/5 MW/10 MW/15 MW/20 MW (default)/25 MW/ 30 MW/40 MW/50 MW/100 MW The scaling of the "Generator Power Bar" is defined by selection of the suitable maximum value.

Availability of Additional Displays > Display Weather

Select On or Off Defines whether an additional, individual weather display is available

> Display Draught

Select On or Off Defines whether an additional, individual draught display is available

> Display Consumption

Select On or Off Defines whether an additional, individual consumption display is available

> Display Generator Power 1

Select On or Off Defines whether an additional, individual generator power display is available (Norcontrol interface)

> Display Generator Power 2

Select On or Off Defines whether an additional, individual generator power display is available (analog and ISL interface)

> Remaining Power Displayed as Used Power > Display Generator Power 3

Displacement Table

Select On or Off Defines whether an additional, individual generator power display is available (NMEA interface) The displacement table should be used only, if the values for the displacement have been calculated by the yard. If no values are available, the table should not be filled in.

> Draught 1...10

Set the draught values in 0.1 m steps (default = 0 m)

> Displacement 1...10

Set the displacement value to the corresponding draught value in 1 t steps (default = 0 t)

Squat Coefficient

136

Select Yes or No (default) Defines whether the analog input for the remaining power is interpreted as input for the used power.

The squat coefficient should be filled in only, if the value has been calculated by the yard. If no value is available, the default value 1.5 must be used.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

5.11 Configure Menu

Conning (cont. ) Configure > Conning Azimuth Thruster Parameters > Azimuth Thruster 1...4 > Azimuth Thruster x Bow midship

3

For Azimuth Thruster 1: Select Not connected / Stern Thruster / Stern Starboard Thruster - Ships with a stern midshp AZT: select Stern Thruster - Ships with two main aft AZTs: select Stern Starboard Thruster; AZT 2 must be set to Stern Port Thruster. For Azimuth Thruster 2: Select Not connected / Stern Port Thruster - Ships with two main aft AZTs: select Stern Port Thruster; AZT 1 must be set to Stern Starboard Thruster.

Bow port

4

1

2

1

Stern

Stern port

Stern starboard

Bow starboard

Center

2

1

Behind center

Before center

3 4 3

2

1

2

1

2

1

ztr1 654.eps

3

For Azimuth Thruster 3: Select Not Connected / Bow Midship Thruster / Bow Starboard Thruster / Center Thruster / Behind Center Thruster - Ships with one additional bow AZT: select Bow Midship Thruster. - Double end ferries with four main AZTs: select Bow Starboard Thruster. - Ships with one additional center AZT: select Center Thruster. - Ships with two additional AZTs at center line: select Behind Center Thruster. AZT 4 must be set to Before Center Thruster. For Azimuth Thruster 4: Select Not connected / Bow Port Thruster / Before Center Thruster - Double end ferries with for main AZTs: select Bow Port Thruster. - Ships with two additional AZTs at center line: select Before Center Thruster. AZT 3 must be set to Behind Center Thruster.

> Add a Label (Number) to the Thruster Display

Select No (default) or Yes. The number is added automatically and cannot be edited.

> Add a Propeller to the Thruster Display

Select No (default) / Pushing Propeller or Pulling Propeller. Defines what kind of symbol for a propeller is added to the thruster display.

> Thruster Angle Display Mode

Select 0 to 360° (default) or ±180°. Defines whether the thruster angle is displayed in a range of 0...360° or ±180°.

> Thruster Angle Display Color

Select No (default)/Red if Angle & RPM are positive/Green if Angle & RPM are positive Defines whether the thruster angle values are displayed colored and the display colour for positive values of Angle and RPM.

> Colored Angle Display Limit

Enter a value in 1° steps (default = 1°). Input of the thruster angle at which the colour changes from white to red/green if the parameter Thruster Angle Display Coloured is set to Yes.

> Scale Orientation

Select 0° up (default) or 180° up. Defines the orientation of the azimuth thruster scale.

> Maximum Thruster RPM

Maximum value for the scale in revolutions per minute.

> Maximum Thruster Power

Maximum value for the scale in MW.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

137

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

5.11 Configure Menu

5.11.13

ECDIS

The ECDIS menu is available only if at least one MULTIPILOT 1100 has been defined in the System Layout menus. ECDI S Configure > ECDIS > Chart Database ENC Database > ENC Database

Select Yes (default) or No Defines whether the ENC database is available

ARCS Database > ARCS Database

Select Yes (default) or No Defines whether the ARCS database is available

C-MAP CM93/2 Database C-MAP CM93/2 Database

Select Yes (default) or No Defines whether the CM93/2 database is available

C-MAP CM93/3 Database C-MAP CM93/3 Database

Select Yes (default) or No Defines whether the CM93/3 database is available

Direct ENC Database Direct ENC Database

Select Yes (default) or No Defines whether the Direct ENC database is available

Own Database Own Database

5.11.14

Select Yes (default) or No Defines whether the Own database is available

VDR

See Section 5.5 from page 97 on for the connection and configuration of a VDR.

138

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

5.12

5.12 Service Menu

Service Menu

The tree shows all available submenus. By clicking on a + symbol, the tree is expanded and the + becomes a -. By clicking on -, the tree is compressed again.

ztr1_135.gif

The Service register offers the possibility of making adjustments while the radar is in operation. The settings which can be made by means of the Configure register are the basic settings. Tree For the first-time setting-to-work, it is necessary to keep to a particular order when making the adjustments. The order is shown in Section 6 on page 157.

Service menu

To make the complete PPI visible for measurements and adjustments, the main window of the System Maintenance Manager is closed if a submenu has been selected. A dialogue box is opened on the right-hand side of the screen. This dialogue box contains an input field for the parameter value(s) and a display field which shows important existing settings and measurement values. By means of the list box, selöect the parameter which is to be adjusted. To return to the System Maintenance Manager, this dialogue box must be closed.

Display field

Input fields

ztr1_136.gif

Parameter selection

Dialogue box for transceiver adjustments (example MBS)

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

139

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

5.12 Service Menu

5.12.1

Indicator

5.12.1.1

Monitor Adjust

The monitor can be adjusted by means of an on-screen display. The size of the monitor is displayed. With the buttons Up and Down, first the OSD menu of the monitor is opened, then the parameter can be selected. With + and - the values can be set. Depending on the radar version, the monitors and the handling of their OSD menus are different. Some types are equipped with a switch "OSM / RS232". If it is necessary to operate the monitor with its own buttons or to adjust "Brilliance", the switch must be set to "OSM". To be able to operate the on-screen menus by means of the radar service menus, the switch must be set to "RS232".

ztr1_137.gif

If the display color, the brightness or contrast are not correct or if there are differences between monitors in one system, the monitor default settings could be wrong. See Section 8.2.7 on page 184 for further information.

Monitor Adjust dialogue box

5.12.1.2

RDC Service and Adjust

The RDC Service and Adjust offers facilities for an automatic adjustment of the video offsets and tools for the advanced diagnosis of the TVA signal.

ztr1_026.gif

Usually, only the ADC Threshold function is used for the setting-towork of the radar. The other functions are advanced tools for diagnosis in case of problems.

RDC Service and Adjust

140

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

5.12 Service Menu

ADC Threshold Adjust (Video and ARPA Offset) The following adjustment must be performed at every Indicator for all Transceivers. 1.

The Transceiver must be selected (same way as in the normal operational mode).

2.

The Transceiver must be switched on and operated as master.

3.

The Auto button must be clicked once. The values are measured and saved automatically (PPI video offset, ARPA video offset, GND reference).

4.

The procedure must be repeated for all other Transceivers in the system.

ztr1_027.gif

It is possible to modify the values manually. The effect on the radar video can be watched in the PPI. The values can be reset to the currently saved values by means of the Revert button. It is strongly advised to use the values which have been determined by means of the automatic measurement function.

RDC Service and Adjust

A/Polar-Scope-Display

In A-scope mode, the video signal is displayed in an x/y system of coordinates. The y-axis shows the video amplitude, the X-axis the distance of the target. The parameters are the azimuth for the display and the range. It is possible to set the range and the azimuth by means of VRM and EBL 1 or 2. The resolution of the Y-axis can be modified.

ztr1_028.gif

The scope functionality can be used to display the TVA signal as in an oscilloscope.

A/Polar Scope Display

In polar scope mode, the TVA signal is displayed in a circular mode. The azimuth of the displayed signals corresponds to the azimuth of the targets. The length of the signal corresponds to the strength of the signal. The ARPA PPI function shows the video signal which is used for the ARPA processing with the fixed range of 20 NM. Status displays The status displays have the following meanings: TRIGGER: RDC SEA: ARPA ON: VIDEO:

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

green green green green

= = = =

trigger signal measured, red = no trigger system, insensitive = undefined Video STC on, insensitive = Video STC off ARPA working, insensitive = ARPA not working video signals are transmitted to the main processor

141

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

Technical Manual

5.12 Service Menu

5.12.1.3

Check RDC Alarm IO

To check the function of the alarm relay, click on the buttons. The colour of the activated buttons changes and the selected relay is activated. The correct operation of the relays can be measured at the terminals of the Interconnection Board.

ztr1_187.gif

The Indicators Ack Buzzer (In 1) and External Input (In 2) show whether an alarm signal is active at the alarm inputs of the RDC.

5.12.1.4

Serial I/O Monitor

By means of the Serial I/O monitor, the data communication between the 4 serial interfaces of the RDC or the 5 se

ztr1_077.gif

rial interfaces of the COM Expander and the connected ship’s sensors can be monitored and saved on a diskette. To monitor the serial interfaces of the COM Expander, the Indicator to which the COM Expander is connected must be the sensor master. The interface driver must have been configured beforehand (Section 5.11.7.2). The interface must be selected by means of the list box. By means of the buttons Rx and Tx, it must be selected whether the outgoing or the incoming signals are monitored. If the button Start is clicked, the data is read and Serial I/O Monitor displayed in the display field. If the button Clear is clicked, the display field is cleared. The protocol can be saved to a diskette by clicking on Save to Disk. Existing protocol files on the diskettes will be overwritten.

142

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

Technical Manual

5.12.1.5

5.12 Service Menu

Software Update (+PCBs)

RADARPILOT 1100, CHARTRADAR 1100:

To perform an update, press the button Software Update and carry out the instructions on the screen. After the boot diskette has been inserted and the Yes button has been clicked, the system reboots. The boot sequence is modified automatically for a diskette boot (no DIP switches need to be set for the boot sequence). All other diskettes are requested by messages on the screen.

ztr1_138.gif

The system’s software (including the software of the pcbs TCU, RDC, COM Expander, Analog Interface) is updated by means of a diskette drive. Five diskettes (GE3062G004, Order No. 390001277) are needed: Flash Update Facility Boot Disk Flash Update Distribution Disk 1 of 4 Flash Update Distribution Disk 2 of 4 Flash Update Distribution Disk 3 of 4 Flash Update Distribution Disk 4 of 4

After the new software has been installed, all DIL switches must be set to the normal operation and the radar must be switched off and then on again to reboot. MULTIPILOT 1100: The system’s software (including the software of the pcbs TCU, RDC, COM Expander, Analog Interface) is updated by means of a CD-ROM. The CD ROM RP3065G010 (Order No. 390001627) is needed.

After the new software has been installed, all DIL switches must be set to normal operation and the MULTIPILOT must be switched off and then on again to reboot.

zmp1_138.gif

To perform an update, press the button Software Update and carry out the instructions on the screen. After the CD ROM has been inserted and the Yes button has been clicked, the system reboots. The boot sequence is modified automatically for a CD ROM boot (no DIP switches need to be set for the boot sequence).

NOTE: The pcbs TCU, RDC, COM Expander/Analog Interface are automatically updated during the process. The TCU and the Analog Interface must not be updated at the same time from different Indicators. This could cause problems on the CAN bus and the TCU could be set to an undefined status (and would have to be exchanged in this case). In a NACOS, the software versions of all components must belong to the same NACOS software version. See the product notes for further information about SW upgrade kits.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

143

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration 5.12 Service Menu

5.12.1.6

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

PCB Software Update

During a system software update, the pcbs TCU, RDC, Analog Interface and COM Expander are also updated with the relevant software version. If one of these pcbs has been exchanged, it must be checked for the correct software version. With the function PCB Software Update, the following pcbs are checked for a valid software version and updated if necessary: -

TCU (all TCUs in the system) RDC Analog Interface (if connected) COM Expander (if connected)

It must be ensured that the mains switches of all other electronics units are switched off before the check/ update is started. To start the check/update, the OK button must be clicked. The system will reboot when the update has been finished.

5.12.1.7

RKE Software Update

By means of this function, it is possible to update the software of the Remote Keyboard Electronics unit (KBC pcb GE3048G200 with software version A or newer. For the determination of the software version, see Section 5.10.2). The instructions on the screen must be followed. Insert the update diskette and click on OK to start the update or click on Cancel to exit the update routine. If the update is started, every connected Remote Keyboard Electronics is checked for the current software version. An update is performed only, if necessary. NOTE: The update lasts about 8 minutes for the master Remote Keyboard Electronics unit. After the master has been updated, the slaves are updated automatically. The update for each slave takes about 35 s. It is definitely advisable not to use any Operating Unit in the system during the update. If the system is operated by means of the Operating Units during the update, it may happen that the update of the Remote Keyboard Electronics currently being updated is restarted. In case of any failure during the update, the message Software Update failed at RKE=x will be displayed and the update must be repeated. The Display Electronics Unit must be restarted after the successful software update. The correct software update can be checked by means of the Telemonitoring Data menu.

5.12.1.8

RKE Settings

This menu appears only, if an RKE is connected. By means of the RKE (Remote Keyboard Electronics) settings, the type of monitor connected can be defined. This is necessary for the monitor driver settings (important for ECDIS) and the OSD monitor adjustments (function Monitor Adjust) which can be performed also at the slave Operating Unit. All RKEs of the system can be parameterized at one Display Electronics Unit. The RKE to be parameterized must be selected from the Selected RKE listbox. The RKE which is connected directly to the operated electronics unit, usually the master, is marked by means of a "*". The display window below the listbox shows the number and the status of the selected RKE.

144

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration 5.12 Service Menu

The type of monitor can be selected by means of the Monitor Type (Control Protocol) listbox. If the parameter Other types (Use RKE DIP Switch) is selected, the settings of the DIP switch on the RKE pcb are valid. Any other setting (including the setting None) of the listbox overwrites the setting of the DIP switch. For further information on the DIP switch, see the technical manual of the Remote Keyboard Electronics. NOTE: In master/slave installations, the RKE of the master must be configured with None and the DIP switch must be set to "no monitor", because the serial interface of the monitor is usually connected to the Display Electronics Unit and not to the RKE. See also the parameter Monitor Control Interface.

5.12.1.9

Start Program (Diskette)

Starts maintenance/service programs from a diskette if available.

5.12.2

Transceiver The Transceiver Adjust settings replace many adjustments which can also be performed by means of the potentiometers on the Modulator or TCU boards.

5.12.2.1

Setting-to-Work

> Headmarker Display field: Input field:

Antenna Speed Headmarker correction angle ±180°

The headmarker of the currently selected Transceiver can be adjusted in 0.1° steps by means of the ↑↓ buttons. To store the values, click Save. The headmarker cannot be adjusted mechanically. It can be adjusted in the complete range (±180°) by software. Adjust the headmarker by modifying the value in the input field. A target at a distance of 2...4 NM must appear on the PPI with the same azimuth as detected visually. The headmarker adjustment must be performed with the Scanner in both speeds if available (dual speed Antenna Unit is optional). > Trigger Delay Display field: Input field:

No information available Value for the Trigger Delay 0...150

The trigger delay of the currently selected Transceiver can be adjusted by means of the ↑↓ buttons. To store the values, click Save. The trigger delay performs the correction of the range error. Adjust the trigger delay by modifying the value in the input field. Targets at a known distance must be displayed with the correct distance on the PPI. If no targets are available, straight lines near the ship must be displayed correctly. > STC Delay Display field: Input field:

Range, Status STC Delay

The STC delay adjustment must be performed in the ranges 0.25 NM, 1.5 NM, 3 NM, 6 NM and 12 NM. The radar must be switched on and the SEA indicator must be set to 0%. Adjust the STC delay so that the main bang largely disappears but the video starts immediately after the main bang.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

145

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

5.12 Service Menu

If the main bang is too large, the antenna matching and the RF installation must be checked, and corrected if necessary. > Video MBS Display field: Input fields:

Range, Status MBS Amplitude, MBS Delay

Before the Video MBS adjustment is started, the trigger delay and STC delay adjustments must have been performed. The main bang should be mostly suppressed by the STC adjustment. If the main bang is still visible, it can be suppressed with the Video MBS adjust. The video MBS adjustment must be performed in the ranges 0.25 NM, 1.5 NM, 3 NM, 6 NM and 12 NM. Set SEA to 100% and adjust the centre area without loss of targets. > PMA Display Display field: Input fields:

No information available PMA Display Start and PMA Display End

ztr1_172.eps

Defines the sector for the measurement of the Performance Monitor Amplitude. The default values are 270°...90°. These values depend on the alignment of the Gearbox. The sector should be defined as 180° wide. It must start with the azimuth value 90° before the azimuth of the beam when it lies at right angles over the plastic window in the outer surface of the Gearbox. The window covers the microwave detector diode. The sector must end 90° behind the beam azimuth.

Fig. 5-17

146

PMA Display

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

5.12 Service Menu

> PM Adjust Before the PM settings are made, it is necessary to adjust the performance monitor oscillator. The TCU allows the adjustment by means of the input field PM Tuning as described below. Display field Input field: 1.

2. 3.

No information available PM Tuning buttons for PMV Adj and PMA Adj

Performance Monitor Oscillator Select the 24 NM range. Switch AFC OFF! Tune the video display to the maximum. Switch the performance monitor on. Generate a strong noise by means of GAIN. Adjust the PM signal by means of alternating adjustment of PM Tuning and reduction of GAIN (reduce the brightness of the inner circle by means of GAIN until it is only faintly visible and tune it to maximum brightness by means of PM Tuning; repeat as long as the circle can be made visible by means of PM Tuning). Start the measurement of the performance monitor video level by clicking on PMV Adj. Performance Monitor Amplitude: If possible, switch off all other radars. Click on PMA Adj. The measurement takes about 6 seconds. Click the Save button.

PMA (16 NM)

ztr1_025.eps

PMV (6 NM)

Fig. 5-18

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

Performance monitor display (drawing to illustrate the principle)

147

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

5.12 Service Menu

5.12.2.2

Advanced Settings (Magnetron Current, Tuning Offset, STC Compensation)

> Magnetron Note: If the Modulator has been changed, a temporary setting for the magnetron current must be performed as soon as the radar is switched on again. Follow the instructions for the exchange of the Modulator in the technical manual of the Gearboxes/Transceivers.

ztr1_653.gif

Note: Before an adjustment or a check of the magnetron current, the Transceiver should have been working for about 20 mins in the 12 NM range.

Adjustment: The adjustment must be performed only in the 12 NM range. When another range is selected, the Start button is insensitive. After the 12 NM range has been set, click on Start to start the adjustment. The result of the adjustment is displayed in the input fields and a comment is shown. If no failure is detected, the values must be saved by clicking the Save button. Usually, it is not necessary and definitely not advisable to modify the values of Imag1, Imag2 and Pulse Length Control manually when the automatic adjustment has been performed. All ranges should be checked. Only when in ranges ≤1.5 NM the value of Actual Current is below 5 A and/or the display of the targets is not satisfactory, can the pulse length be increased carefully step by step. If the value of Actual Current is higher than 11 A in the 0.75 NM and 1.5 NM range, the pulse length can be decreased. Manual modifications must be saved. Note: For short pulse lengths (ranges ≤1.5 NM), a deviation of ±30% between actual and nominal magnetron current is tolerable. A deviation of -60%...+30% is tolerable in ranges of ≤3.0 NM. CAUTION Check the magnetron current (Actual) while modifying Imag1 manually. The "Actual" value should not exceed the "Nominal" value. The values of the heating voltage and the bias are shown for information only. The displayed heating voltage is different from the voltage which can be measured at the Modulator. See the description of the Modulator in the technical manual of the Gearboxes/Transceivers for information in detail.

148

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

> Tuning Offset Display field Input field:

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration 5.12 Service Menu

No information available Tuning Offset

To adjust the tuning offset, switch the radar on and select the 12 NM range. Set the operator’s Tuning ztr1_165.cdr indicator on the display to 50%. By modifying the tuning offset value in the input field, the tuning indication bar must be adjusted to maximum length. Tuning Indication Gain If modifications of the tuning adjustment causes only small deflections of the tuning indicator, it might be difficult to find the maximum adjustment. In this case it is possible to increase the deflections by means of a higher gain. The following values proved to be practical: Range 0.75 NM = 3, range 1.5 NM = 1.5, ranges 3, 6, 12 NM = 1.0 Default value is 1.0. > STC Compensation This parameter is visible only, if the parameter Video Anti Clutter Sea is set to off. Input fields: Amplitude, Length To adjust the STC Compensation, select the 12 NM range. Set SEA to maximum and adjust GAIN in a way that the noise is clearly visible. The default settings are: Amplitude: 30 Length (X-Band): 60 Length (S-Band): 40 Check that, at the end of the STC-affected area, neither a noise ring nor a dark ring appears. If necessary, correct by means of Length.

5.12.2.3

Magnetron Hours

The function Magnetron Hours shows the working hours of the magnetron. The counter can be reset by means of the Reset button.

5.12.2.4

Antenna Information

The function Antenna Info shows information about the rotary frequency of the Scanner. It displays the status of the radar, the existing speed and pulse count of the Scanner, and the minimum and maximum pulse counts.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

149

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

Technical Manual

5.12 Service Menu

5.12.3

Interswitch By means of the button Input Adjust On/Off the Interswitch (PCI) can be switched to the service mode for the adjustment of the TVA inputs. This function can be used only if an Interswitch has been configured in the system layout. If no Interswitch is available, the message Not configured appears in the data field.

ztr1_145.gif

If the Interswitch has been switched to the service mode, a corresponding warning message appears on all Indicators. For the adjustments of the Interswitch, see the Interswitch service manual.

Interswitch menu

5.12.4

NACOS (Not available for standard radar systems) The parameters of the TRACKPILOT/ENGINE INTERFACE are stored in the TRACKPILOT electronics unit and in the IDE memory module. If one of the components is selected, the radar calls the parameters from the TRACKPILOT electronics unit automatically and a small dialogue box is opened next to the PPI. For the TRACKILOT, the parameters are split up into the groups User Parameters, System Parameters and Special Parameters. By means of the check box Trial Run, a trial program is started which helps to determine the controller coefficients.

ztr1_189.cdr

The configuration of the TRACKPILOT and ENGINE INTERFACE can be performed in the Configure menus and/or in the Service menus. During setting-to-work, the settings should be performed in the Configure menus. During the use of the Service menus, the PPI is not hidden by any menus and every modification of the parameters performed in the dialogue box affects the TRACKPILOT immediately and so these menus should be used during trials. For a description of the parameters (TRACKPILOT/ENGINE INTERTRACKPILOT service menu FACE), see the technical manual of the TRACKPILOT.

150

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

5.13

5.13 Commissioning Data Menu

Commissioning Data Menu NOTE: It is advisable to parameterize the entire system always at one and the same Display Electronics Unit and to transfer the parameters to the other Display Electronics Units subsequently. In this way, it is possible to prevent an incomplete set of parameters from being transferred to a Display Electronics Unit with an complete set of parameters, which is then overwritten. Config Transfer It is possible to store parameters which have been entered on one Indicator to a second Indicator (or to all Indicators) without the use of diskettes. In this way, it is possible to parameterize all radars of a system at one Indicator. By means of the function Transmit, the parameters can be transferred to the selected Indicator via CAN bus (or stored on a diskette). By means of the function Receive, it is possible to load the parameters from a selected Indicator (or to load them from a diskette). The function Transmit writes the files R10k.sam (configuration file), R10kcom.rep (commissioning report), version.txt (list of versions; only if a backup onto a floppy disk is performed) and errorhist.txt (list of errors; only if a backup onto a floppy disk is performed) onto a diskette or stores it to the selected Indicator. By clicking on Transfer, the backup of the files starts.

Existing files on a diskette are overwritten (a warning will appear). When changes in the configuration have been performed, the parameters should be saved on the "Configuration Backup" diskettes.

ztr1_146.gif

If the files version.txt and/or errorhist.txt have not been generated so far, this is performed automatically when the transfer is started.

Commissioning Data > Config Transfer, Transfer

NOTE: If the configuration file R10k.sam has been sent to another Indicator, it does not automatically replace the existing configuration of the Indicator. A warning appears at that Indicator. This warning cannot be acknowledged. The Indicator must be restarted to take over the new configuration and to acknowledge the warning. ztr1_141.gif

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

151

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

Technical Manual

5.13 Commissioning Data Menu

The function Receive loads the configuration files from the selected Indicator or from the diskette to the operated Indicator. Ensure that these parameters are valid. Click on Transfer to start the restorage of the files.

ztr1_148.gif

The parameters are not taken over automatically. The warning New Indicator Config File appears. This warning cannot be acknowledged. To take over the parameters and to acknowledge the warning, the Indicator must be restarted.

Commissioning Data > Config Transfer, Receive

If a TRACKPILOT is connected, the R10k.sam file can be transferred also to the TRACKPILOT (but not received from the TRACKPILOT). The file contains the parameters for the conning display. The R10k.sam file is also transferred to the TRACKPILOT, when "All Indicators" has been selected. The parameters of the TRACKPILOT/ENGINE INTERFACE itself cannot be transferred by means of the Config Transfer function. This must be performed by means of the Configuration menus. Service Report

ztr1_147.gif

It is important to note what work has been done at what time. The service report has to be filled in after each item of repair or maintenance work. Click on Service Report to view the service reports which have been filled in so far.

Commissioning Data menu

152

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

5.14

5.14 Motherboard BIOS Settings

Motherboard BIOS Settings The following instructions are valid for the motherboard DFI CA64. If different motherboards are used, this section will be extended. NOTE: To perform the BIOS settings, a PC keyboard with a PS/2 connector must be connected at the Display Electronics Unit instead of the Radar Keyboard.

5.14.1

Entering the BIOS Setup Menu

The keyboard must be connected by means of the PS/2 connector in the same way as the Radar Keyboard (see Section 4.5.3 on page 49 or Section 4.5.9 on page 64). If the radar is equipped with a Radar Keyboard, this must be disconnected beforehand.

ztr1_173.jpg

It is necessary to connect a PC keyboard with a PS/2 connector to the motherboard. Otherwise it is not possible to operate the BIOS Setup menu.

Fig. 5-19 Soft power switch of the motherboard

1.

Connect the keyboard as described above.

2.

The motherboard has a soft power switch. This switch is enabled in the BIOS settings of a new board or a board which is configured with the default settings (e.g. after battery exchange). In this case, close ATX-SW (DFI CA61/CB61/CA64) by means of a jumper, switch on the Display Electronics Unit by means of the monitor power switch and remove the jumper. With the BIOS settings described below, the soft power switch will be disabled and from then on, the system can be started without the jumper. If the system starts without the use of the jumper, the BIOS is not configured with the default settings.

3.

While the system is starting up, press Del until the BIOS Setup menu appears.

NOTE: The BIOS settings must be correct to have the radar started by means of the monitor power switch. If the BIOS settings are incorrect, the radar might not start when the monitor is switched on.

5.14.2

Procedure To set the correct parameters, first load the default settings and then modify only the parameters which are different from the default settings. In the following description, only the parameters which have to be modified are mentioned. All other parameters must be left at their default values.

5.14.3

Operation of the BIOS Setup Menus The operation of the BIOS Setup menus is described by means of the help function of the software and/ or help texts which are displayed on the screen, depending on the selected submenu or parameter. The operation of the BIOS Setup menus might be different for the various motherboards.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

153

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

Technical Manual

5.14 Motherboard BIOS Settings

For the navigation in the menus, the keys PgUp, PgDn, the cursor keys and the Enter key must be used. Some entries must be confirmed by means of the Y key. If the keyboard which is used for the parameterization is not a US version, it might be possible that the Y key is not at the correct position. In this case, the button has to be used which is at the position of the Y key on a standard US PC keyboard. After the values have been modified, the modifications must be saved before the BIOS Setup menus are exited. The system is then rebooted automatically.

5.14.4

Parameters of Motherboard DFI CA64

Loading the Default Settings Select LOAD OPTIMIZED DEFAULTS with the cursor keys and confirm. All parameters are now set to the default values. The parameters which have to be set differently from the default values are described in the following tables. Parameters which have to be set differently from the Default Settings First set the current time and date (UTC). Then modify the following parameters in the submenus: BIOS Settings for DFI CA64 Submenu

Parameter

Setting

STANDARD CMOS FEATURES

Drive A

1.44M, 3.25 in

Halt On

All, But Disk/Key

Virus Warning

Disabled 1)

Quick Power On Self Test

Enabled 1)

First Boot Device

SCSI

Second Boot Device

RADAR/CHARTRADAR: Floppy MULTIPILOT: CDROM

Third Boot Device

HDD-0

Boot Up Floppy Seek

Disabled 1)

ADVANCED CHIPSET FEATURES

OnChip USB

Disabled

INTEGRATED PERIPHERALS

IDE Primary Prefetch

ADVANCED BIOS FEATURES

OnChip Sound

Onboard Legacy Audio

1) 2)

154

Disabled

2)

Disable 2)

Disable

Onboard Serial Port 1

3F8/IRQ4

Onboard Serial Port 2

2F8/IRQ3

POWER MANAGEMENT SETUP

PWR Lost Resume State

Turn On

PNP/PCI CONFIGURATION

Resources controlled by

Auto (ESCD)

Assign IRQ for USB

Disabled

Is the default setting, please check For motherboards with sound option only

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration

Technical Manual

5.15

5.15 Upgrade Kits

Upgrade Kits Switch off the power supply to the system before starting the installation process!

5.15.1

Analog Interface Kit The Analog Interface kit consists of the following components: -

Analog Interface pcb (HS10-SIR10T) Mains cable to the Interconnection Board Data cable to the Interconnection Board 4 screws M3x6

To install the Analog Interface, switch off the Display Electronics Unit. Ensure, that the gyro is switched off! The gyro power supply is independent of the radar power supply. The pcb must be installed in the Interconnection Box. The installation steps are as follows: 1. 2. 3.

4. 5. 6. 7.

Open the Interconnection Box. See Section 8.4 on page 188 for information on how to open the Interconnection Box. Mount the pcb on the threaded bolts provided next to the Interconnection Board. Connect the power supply cable to J7 of the Interconnection Box and to TB50 (N), TB51 (L1) and TB52 (PE) of the Analog Interface pcb. See Section 4.5.10 on page 68 for a description of the Analog Interface and its terminals. Remove the four jumpers from J5 of the Interconnection Board and connect the data cable to J5 of the Interconnection Board and to J7 of the Analog Interface. Connect the gyro or log. Close the housing. Start the system and set the parameters for the Analog Interface by means of the System Maintenance Manager. See Section 5.6 from page 98 on for information about the System Maintenance Manager.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

155

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration 5.15 Upgrade Kits

5.15.2

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

RGB Buffer Kit The RGB Buffer kit consists of the following components: -

RGB Buffer pcb Flat cable to the Interconnection Board Monitor cable to the Graphics And Video Processor (GVP) in the Display Electronics Unit 4 screws M3x30 4 threaded bolts

To install the RGB Buffer, switch off the Display Electronics Unit. The pcb must be installed in the Interconnection Box. The installation steps are as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Open the Interconnection Box. See Section 8.4 on page 188 for information on how to open the Interconnection Box. Insert the threaded bolts to replace the four screws from the holes shown in Figure 4-17 on page 65. Mount the pcb on the threaded bolts provided, as shown on page 64. Connect the flat cable to J6 of the Interconnection Board and to J1 of the RGB Buffer pcb. See Section 4.5.13 for a description of the RGB Buffer and its terminals. Connect the monitor cable to J2 of the RGB Buffer and to the VGA connector of the GVP unit in the Display Electronics Unit. Close the housing. Connect the monitor to J3 and the slave monitor to J4 of the RGB Buffer. Check the DIP switches for correct 75 Ω termination (usually a termination is not necessary, because the monitor itself is terminated). Start the system. Further software settings are not necessary.

If more than three monitors are needed, the 5 Channel Video Switch SH3023 must be used.

156

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

Setting-To-Work Guide The following instructions will guide you through the first setting-to-work of a RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR 1100 or the radar components of a MULTIPILOT 1100. The workflow description below does not contain all necessary information for the setting-to-work but it shows the correct sequence of all settings and adjustments and it gives cross references to the relevant sections in this manual where you can find information in detail. Settings and adjustments which must be performed by means of the System Maintenance Manager software are described by means of help texts which appear after a few seconds when the cursor is placed over a button or which can be called by means of the button. Section 6.2, E x a m p l e o f t h e C o n f i g u r a t i o n o f a D u a l I n s t a l l a t i o n w i t h a C H A R T P I L O T , shows the most important configuration parameter settings of a dual installation in detail.

6.1

Setting-To-Work Workflow for the Radar Components 1.

Cabling and Installation

The mechanical installation and the cabling of a radar system must be planned by means of the manufacturer’s outline drawings and cabling documents. It is not possible to carry out the installation in a reasonable way without such preparations. The cabling documents describe most of the possible versions of the system installation. It is advisable to read the general remarks and the remarks printed on the plans. The outline drawings also contain drawings of components which may not be included in the delivery of your system. The installation and cabling work must be performed by competent persons. 2.

Preparations

The following checks and settings must be performed before the mains supply to the system is switched on:

3.

-

Check whether the mains selector switches are set correctly (Interconnection Board, mains input unit of the Transceiver).

-

Check whether the power supply for the Antenna Unit has been connected correctly.

-

Set the Transceiver No. on the TCU pcb by means of the DIP switch 1. See DIP switch 1 description in the technical manual of the Gearboxes/Transceivers. For a single installation, set the Transceiver No. to "1".

-

Set the indicator No. on the RDC pcb by means of the DIP switch. See the DIP switch description on page 53. For a single installation, set the indicator No. to "1". The indicator No. and transceiver No. of one and the same radar must be identical.

-

The correct jumper settings for the X-/S-Band version and the transmitter power should be set ex works.

CAN Bus Termination

For further information, see Section 4.3 on page 42. The radar may work without termination but it is highly advisable to install the termination to guarantee undisturbed functioning in all environmental conditions. 4.

Ethernet Network Termination

If the system has an Ethernet network, the cabling must be performed in accordance with the advice in Section 4.5.8 on page 62. Now switch on the power to the system.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

157

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

6

6.1 Setting-To-Work Workflow for the Radar Components

6 Setting-To-Work Guide 6.1 Setting-To-Work Workflow for the Radar Components

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

5.

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

System Layout and Configuration of Subsystems

The system layout of the entire system must be defined by means of the System Maintenance Manager. The parameterization and subsequent modifications should be performed always at one and the same Indicator. See Section 5.11 on page 112 for general hints about the menu handling procedure, and, see Section 5.11.5 on page 114 for further information about entering the system layout. If the system layout has been entered, only the relevant subsystems remain in the menu tree and have to be configured:

6.

-

Indicator Configure each available Indicator (e.g. type of monitor/keyboard) by means of the Administration menus. See the hints in Section 5.11.6.

-

Transceiver Configure each Transceiver by loading the factory-defined parameters from the available TCUs. This is the precondition for the transceiver adjustment (see 6, T r a n s c e i v e r A d j u s t m e n t s ). Do not press the Save button! Otherwise the invalid default parameters of the RDC will overwrite the parameters of the TCU which have been preset ex works. Only the following parameters have to be set in the transceiver configuration menu: Antenna Position Frequency Deviation (if necessary) Blanking Sector (if requested) Speed Capability single/double Antenna Motor Frequency

-

Configure the system’s interfaces for the ship’s sensors. Depending on the interface type, use the menu item Serial Interfaces of the relevant Indicator, and/or Sensor Interfaces. For further information, see Section 5.11.8 on page 127.

-

Configure all ship-specific data, especially the system position in the menu System/Ship Parameters > Ship Data.

Transceiver Adjustments

Use the Service menu to perform the transceiver adjustments. See Section 5.12.2 from page 145 on for further information. All adjustments of the Setting-to-Work menu have to be performed. Every adjustment must be stored by means of the Save button. The parameters are stored in the IDE memory module and in the TCU. Before the performance monitor adjustments can be performed, the RDC pcb must be adjusted. 7.

Indicator Adjustments (RDC) -

8.

RDC adjustments (ADC threshold adjustments) as described in Section 5.12.1.2 on page 140. The adjustment must be performed at every single Indicator for all Transceivers.

Backup

The parameter settings must be stored on diskettes in duplicate. One copy should stay on the ship (it can be stored in the technical manual) and one copy must be sent to the manufacturer. Use the Commissioning Data menu (Config Transfer) to generate the backup. For further information, see Section 5.13 from page 151 onwards. 9.

Dual or Multiple Installations

All Indicators and Transceivers must be configured at one Indicator. It is possible to load and store the parameters directly from one Indicator to another via CAN-Bus (without use of a backup diskette). This can be performed by means of the function Commissioning Data > Config Transfer of the System Maintenance Manager. See Section 5.13 on page 151 for further information.

158

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual

6 Setting-To-Work Guide 6.1 Setting-To-Work Workflow for the Radar Components

NOTE: To avoid the mistakes which may be caused by originating different parameter settings from different Display Electronics Units, the entire system must be parameterized at one and the same Display Electronics Unit. All parameters must be copied by means of the Config Transfer function afterwards to the other radars. Restart all Display Electronics Units before changing any parameters at other Display Electronics Units.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

159

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

Technical Manual

6.2 Example of the Configuration of a Dual Installation with a CHARTPILOT

Example of the Configuration of a Dual Installation with a CHARTPILOT This example contains the most important parameters for a typical dual installation.

6.2.1

System Diagram

SAM

SAM

GEARBOX with TRANSCEIVER 1 (S-Band)

GEARBOX with TRANSCEIVER 2 (X-Band, 8 ft)

CHARTPILOT

WP 1

WP 2

WP 3

LAN

Indicator 1

Indicator 2

Display Electronics Unit

Display Electronics Unit

Radar Scan Converter

Radar Scan Converter

AIS Electronics Unit

ARPA Electronics Ethernet Module

Interconnection Box

TVA1 out LAN

Ethernet Interconnection

CAN 0, Radar bus

CAN Bus Interconnection

160

Radar Data Converter

TVA1 out

Ethernet Interconnection

CAN Bus Interconnection

CAN 1, Nav bus 1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

Ship's Sensors - Indicator 1 Gyro Output 1 Position 1 Log Wind

Fig. 6-1

Ethernet Module

Ethernet

Interconnection Box

Serial Interface Interconnection

ARPA Electronics

Sensor Input S1 S2

Radar Data Converter

ztr1_190.eps

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

6.2

Serial Interface Interconnection

Ship's Sensors - Indicator 2 Gyro Output 2 Position 2 Echograph 4630

System diagram of a dual installation with CHARTPILOT (example)

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

System Layout Menu

Configure

System Layout

Indicator

Indicator 1 Indicator 2 Indicator 3 Indicator 4 Indicator 5

RADARPILOT 1100 RADARPILOT 1100 Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected

Transceiver

Transceiver 1

Connected

Transceiver 2 Transceiver 3 Transceiver 4 Transceiver 5

Connected Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected

Interswitch

Not Connected

Sensor Interfaces

Sensor Interface 1 Sensor Interface 2

NACOS Configuration

TRACKPILOT Not Connected ENGINE INTERFACE (SPEEDP.) Not Connected

Planning System

Connected Planning System

AIS

Connected to LAN

VDR

Not connected

Fig. 6-2

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

6.2.2

6.2 Example of the Configuration of a Dual Installation with a CHARTPILOT

Not Connected Not Connected

1

System Layout settings for the example of a dual installation

161

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

Technical Manual

6.2 Example of the Configuration of a Dual Installation with a CHARTPILOT

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

6.2.3

Configure (System / Ship Parameters)

Configure

System / Ship Parameters

Ship Data Administration Vessel Shipping Company Flag

MS Test Mustermann German DACF 0087X1120079 0087X1120080

Call Sign Phone Fax MMSI Number 1)

XXX XXX XXX IMO Number XXXX XXX Type of Ship Passenger Vessel Type of Ship coded as No. 69 System Position and other Ship Dimensions 2) Distance to Bow 10 Distance to Stern 120 Distance to SB 8 Distance to P 8 Length at Waterline

122

Nominal Speed Acceleration

20.0 0.020

Maximum ROT Alarm Limit Position Quality Check Minimum Radius Maximum Radius Gyro Monitoring Speed Monitoring Position Monitoring

200°/min Off 0.4 NM 3.0 NM

Basic Radar Video Anti Clutter Sea ARPA Lost Target w.o. Al. AIS Lost Target w.o. Al. TB2 Term 15,16, HM turn

On/Off Position against Redundant Position Sensor

16.0 NM

Off

Not Connected

Default Wind Default Weather

162

Off On/Off Speed against Redundant Speed Sensor Speed against SOG of Main Position Sensor Speed against SOG of Redundant Position Sensor

on 19.5 NM

Startup Sensor Selection Heading Speed Position Time Time from selected Position Sensor Differentiated Heading Default Depth

Fig. 6-3

On/Off Off Gyro against Magnetic Compass Gyro against COG of Main Position Sensor Gyro against COG of Redundant Position Sensor Ignore Gyro against COG above ROT of: Ignore Gyro against COG below Speed of: Full sensitivity Gyro against COG above speed of:

Heading Sensor 1 Log 1 3) Position Sensor 1 Position Sensor 1 Yes Selected Heading Sensor Depth Sensor 1 Wind Sensor 1 Manual Weather

1) 2) 3)

Must be entered for AIS! See Figure 6-4 on page 163. BSH does not allow GPS as speed sensor.

Ship Data and Parameter settings for the example of a dual installation

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

6.2 Example of the Configuration of a Dual Installation with a CHARTPILOT

10 m

8m 8m -4 m 4 m

LT =

Log Transducer, defines the System Position 10 m to Bow, 120 m to Stern, 8 m to P, 8 m to SB

RS =

Radar S-Band antenna, -80 m Distance Longitudinal to System Position

RX =

Radar X-Band antenna, -82 m Distance Longitudinal to System Position

P1 =

GPS Position Sensor 1, -4 m Distance Transversal and -85 m Distance Longitudinal to System Position

P2 =

GPS Position Sensor 2, 4 m Distance Transversal and -85 m Distance Longitudinal to System Position

PAIS =

AIS GPS Antenna, -2 m Distance Transversal and -110 m Distance Longitudinal to System Position

-80 m -82 m -85 m -110 m 120 m

- Longitudinal +

LT

RS RX P1

P2

PAIS -2 m - Transversal +

Fig. 6-4

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

System Position

163

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

Technical Manual

6.2 Example of the Configuration of a Dual Installation with a CHARTPILOT

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

6.2.4

Configure (Radar > Indicator)

Configure

Radar

Indicator

Indicator 1

Administration

Fig. 6-5

164

Installed Type of Tracking Facility Connected Monitor Keyboard Name Alarm Relays Activation Delay System Fault Alarm Dangerous Target Alarm Lost Target Alarm

RADAR 1100 ARPA 16" (AZ 3068) RADAR Keyboard Indicator 1 30 sec Disable Disable Disable

Guard Zone Alarm Allowed to be Sensor Master

Disable Yes

CHARTRADAR Function

Not Available

CHARTRADAR Identification Code CHART Function License Key Conning Based on Specification Radar PPI Radius Monitor Aspect Ratio

XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX Not Available IEC 60936-1 Use Default Use Default

Head-Up PPI Orientation

Bow-up (standard)

Monitor Control Interface

Indicator (COM 1)

Transfer of ARPA Alarms to CP

Yes

Central Dimming Adjustment Double End Ferry

User Controlled No

Indicator 1 configuration settings for the example of a dual installation, part 1

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

6.2 Example of the Configuration of a Dual Installation with a CHARTPILOT

Serial Interfaces

Serial I/O 1 Driver Baud Rate Serial Gyro Position Speed Time Output Depth Wind Weather

Fig. 6-6

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

NMEA183 (IEC61162-1/-2) 38400 Connected Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected

Channel of this Gyro Display Selected Gyro

Heading Sensor 1 No

Transfer GLL Transfer DTM Transfer VTG Transfer HDT Transfer TTM Transfer OSD Transfer MWV

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

Transfer ZDA Transfer DBT Transfer ROT Transfer MWD Transfer VBW Transfer MHU Transfer MMB Transfer MTA Transfer RTE/WPL Serial Output used as

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Not defined

Indicator 1 configuration settings for the example of a dual installation, part 2

165

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

Technical Manual

6.2 Example of the Configuration of a Dual Installation with a CHARTPILOT

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

Serial I/O 2 Driver Baud Rate Serial Gyro Position Speed Time Output Depth Wind

NMEA183 (IEC61162-1/-2) 4800 Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected

Weather

Not Connected

Not Connected Not Connected

1)

Fig. 6-7

166

Channel

Position Sensor 1

Distance Longitudinal Distance Transversal Sensor Number GLL, GGA Selection Use Speed from Position Sensor Use Time from Position Senor

- 85 -4 1 Pos. from GLL Message Yes 1) Yes

Transfer GLL Transfer DTM Transfer VTG Transfer HDT Transfer TTM Transfer OSD Transfer MWV Transfer ZDA

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

Transfer DBT Transfer ROT Transfer MWD Transfer VBW Transfer MHU Transfer MMB Transfer MTA Transfer RTE/WPL Serial Output used as

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF AIS Navigation Data

Set to No for DNV/BSH ships

Indicator 1 configuration settings for the example of a dual installation, part 3

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

Serial I/O 3 Driver Baud Rate Serial Gyro Position Speed Time Output Depth Wind Weather

Serial I/O 4 Driver Baud Rate Serial Gyro Position Speed Time Output Depth Wind Weather

Fig. 6-8

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

NMEA183 (IEC61162-1/-2) 4800 Not Connected Not Connected Connected Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected

NMEA183 (IEC61162-1/-2) 4800 Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected Connected Not Connected

Channel Distance Longitudinal Distance Transversal Log Type Longit. Speed Filter Const. Transversal Speed Const.

Log 1 0 0 1 Axis Log 1 1

Transfer GLL Transfer DTM Transfer VTG Transfer HDT Transfer TTM Transfer OSD Transfer MWV Transfer ZDA

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

Transfer DBT Transfer ROT Transfer MWD Transfer VBW Transfer MHU Transfer MMB Transfer MTA Transfer RTE/WPL

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

Serial Output used as

Not defined

Transfer GLL Transfer DTM Transfer VTG Transfer HDT

OFF OFF OFF OFF

Transfer TTM Transfer OSD Transfer MWV Transfer ZDA Transfer DBT Transfer ROT Transfer MWD Transfer VBW Transfer MHU

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

Transfer MMB Transfer MTA Transfer RTE/WPL

OFF OFF OFF

Serial Output used as

Not defined

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

6.2 Example of the Configuration of a Dual Installation with a CHARTPILOT

Indicator 1 configuration settings for the example of a dual installation, part 4

167

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

Technical Manual

6.2 Example of the Configuration of a Dual Installation with a CHARTPILOT

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

Administration

Indicator 2

Serial Interfaces

Fig. 6-9

168

Installed Type of Tracking Facility RADAR 1100 ARPA Connected Monitor Keyboard Name Alarm Relays Activation Delay System Fault Alarm Dangerous Target Alarm Lost Target Alarm Guard Zone Alarm

16" (AZ 3068) RADAR Keyboard Indicator 2 30 sec Disable Disable Disable Disable

Allowed to be Sensor Master CHARTRADAR Function CHARTRADAR Identification Code CHART Function License Key Conning

Yes Not Available XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX Not Available

Based on Specification Radar PPI Radius Monitor Aspect Ratio

IEC 60936-1 Use Default Use Default

Head-Up Display Orientation Monitor Control Interface

Bow-up (standard) Indicator (COM 1)

Transfer of ARPA Alarms to CP

Yes

Central Dimming Adjustment

User Controlled

Double End Ferry

No

Indicator 2 configuration settings for the example of a dual installation, part 1

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

Serial I/O 1 Driver Baud Rate Serial Gyro Position Speed Time Output Depth Wind Weather

Fig. 6-10

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

NMEA183 (IEC61162-1/-2) 38400 Connected Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

6.2 Example of the Configuration of a Dual Installation with a CHARTPILOT

Channel of this Gyro Display Selected Gyro

Heading Sensor 1 No

Transfer GLL Transfer DTM Transfer VTG Transfer HDT Transfer TTM Transfer OSD

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

Transfer MWV Transfer ZDA Transfer DBT Transfer ROT Transfer MWD Transfer VBW Transfer MHU Transfer MMB

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

Transfer MTA

OFF

Transfer RTE/WPL Serial Output used as

OFF Not defined

Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected

Indicator 2 configuration settings for the example of a dual installation, part 2

169

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

Technical Manual

6.2 Example of the Configuration of a Dual Installation with a CHARTPILOT

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

Serial I/O 2 Driver Baud Rate Serial Gyro Position Speed Time Output Depth Wind Weather

NMEA183 (IEC61162-1/-2) 4800 Not Connected Connected Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected

Channel Distance Longitudinal Distance Transversal Sensor Number GLL, GGA Selection

Position Sensor 2 - 85 +4 2 Pos from GLL message

Use Speed from Position Sensor Use Time from Position Senor

Yes 1) Yes

Transfer GLL Transfer DTM Transfer VTG Transfer HDT Transfer TTM Transfer OSD

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

Transfer MWV Transfer ZDA Transfer DBT Transfer ROT Transfer MWD Transfer VBW Transfer MHU Transfer MMB

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

Transfer MTA Transfer RTE/WPL Serial Output used as

OFF

1)

Fig. 6-11

170

OFF AIS Navigation Data

Set to No for DNV/BSH ships

Indicator 2 configuration settings for the example of a dual installation, part 3

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

Serial I/O 3 Driver Baud Rate Serial Gyro Position Speed Time Output Depth Wind Weather

Serial I/O 4 Driver Baud Rate Serial Gyro Position Speed Time Output Depth Wind Weather

Fig. 6-12

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

NMEA183 (IEC61162-1/-2) 4800 Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected Connected Not Connected Not Connected

NMEA183 (IEC61162-1/-2) 4800 Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected

Transfer GLL Transfer DTM Transfer VTG Transfer HDT Transfer TTM Transfer OSD Transfer MWV Transfer ZDA

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

Transfer DBT Transfer ROT Transfer MWD Transfer VBW Transfer MHU Transfer MMB Transfer MTA Transfer RTE/WPL

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

Serial Output used as

Not defined

Depth Value

Below Transducer

Transfer GLL Transfer DTM

OFF OFF

Transfer VTG Transfer HDT Transfer TTM Transfer OSD Transfer MWV Transfer ZDA Transfer DBT Transfer ROT

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

Transfer MWD Transfer VBW Transfer MHU Transfer MMB Transfer MTA Transfer RTE/WPL

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

Serial Output used as

Not defined

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

6.2 Example of the Configuration of a Dual Installation with a CHARTPILOT

Indicator 2 configuration settings for the example of a dual installation, part 4

171

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

Technical Manual

6.2 Example of the Configuration of a Dual Installation with a CHARTPILOT

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

6.2.5

Configure (Radar > Transceiver)

Configure

Transceiver

Radar

Transceiver 1

Type of Generation Additional Information Frequency Deviation Sector Blanking Antenna

RADAR 1100 S-Band Main Mast 0 Number of Blanking Sectors Speed Capability Distance Longitudinal Distance Transversal Height above Sea Level Beam Width Azimuth Pulses per Revolution Antenna Motor Frequency

Transceiver 2

Last Modification Date

XX.XX.XX

Type of Generation

RADAR 1100 X-Band 12.5 kW

Additional Information Frequency Deviation Sector Blanking Antenna

Main Mast 0 Number of Blanking Sectors Speed Capability

Beam Width Azimuth Pulses per Revolution

1None Single - 82 0 25 1.0 (8 ft Antenna) 1920

Antenna Motor Frequency

60 Hz

Distance Longitudinal Distance Transversal Height above Sea Level

Last Modification Date

Fig. 6-13

172

None Single (Low Speed) - 80 0 28 1.8 415 60 Hz

XX.XX.XX

Transceiver configuration settings for the example of a dual installation

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

Configure (AIS)

Configure

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

6.2.6

6.2 Example of the Configuration of a Dual Installation with a CHARTPILOT

AIS AIS Channel AIS Sensor 1 Distance of GPS Antenna Longi- -110 m tudinal (see Figure 6-4) Distance of GPS Antenna Trans- -2 m versal (see Figure 6-4)

Fig. 6-14

6.2.7

AIS Electronics Unit Sensor Interface S1

IEC 61162-1, 4800 Baud

AIS Electronics Unit Sensor Interface S2

IEC 61162-1, 4800 Baud

AIS Electronics Unit Sensor Interface S3

Not connected

AIS system settings for the example of a dual installation

Configure (Planning System)

Configure

Planning System Select Radar Indicator for CHARTPILOT ARPA Targets Sensor Information via Ethernet to CHARTPILOT Fig. 6-15

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

Indicator 1 True

Planning System settings for the example of a dual installation

173

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

Technical Manual

6.3 Important Hardware Components

Important Hardware Components

6.3.1

COM Expander GE3044G210 TP11, TP12, TP13, TP21, TP22 Manufacturer’s use only. Do not connect wires or jumpers, do not remove jumpers which have been set ex works.

TB1...5 Function Sensor interface, with RS422 plug-in pcb GE3044G218 1 RxD + 2 RxD 3 TxD + 4 TxD 5 GND For all other plug-in pcbs, see Section 4.5.11.1.

TB7

Function

TB2

TB1

TB4

TB5

TB6

1 2 3 4 5 6

Plug-in pcb 3

1 2 3 F1

1 1 TP22 Plug-in pcb 5

1 2 3 4 S1

ON 8 TB6

Function

1 2 3 4

Digital input 1 (+) Digital input 1 (-) Digital input 2 (+) Digital input 2 (-)

DS1 DS2 DS3

8

DS4 DS5 DS6

S1 1

Function

Function

DS1...6 Function green : UART1 working, red: UART1 error, off: interface not used green : UART2 working, red: UART2 error, off: interface not used green : UART3 working, red: UART3 error, off: interface not used green : UART4 working, red: UART4 error, off: interface not used green : UART5 working, red: UART5 error, off: interface not used red flashing at 0.25 Hz (every 4 s) = normal operation 1.0 Hz (once per second) = normal operation (active COM Expander if two COM Expanders are installed) 5.0 Hz (five times per second) = at least one error is active (highest priority)

Fig. 6-16

2 3...7 8

1 1

1 S1

Jumper on 2/3 = digital input (Interconnection Board TB6 3/4) suitable for 20 mA current loop (optocoupler driver input) Jumper on 1/2 and 3/4 = zero potential input (switch) (Interconnection Board TB6 3/4)

174

PE N L1

TB8

Jumper on 2/3 = Digital input (Interconnection Board TB6 1/2) suitable for 20 mA current loop (optocoupler driver input) Jumper on 1/2 and 3/4 = zero potential input (switch) (Interconnection Board TB6 1/2)

DS1 DS2 DS3 DS4 DS5 DS6

Mains supply

1 2 3

1

TP41

TP42

TB8 TP13

TP11 1 1 1

1 TB7 2 3 4 5 TP21 1 1 2 Plug-in pcb 1 Plug-in pcb 2 3 4 5

Termination

Jumper on 1/2 = termination of CAN1 (Navigation Bus). No jumper on 1/2 = CAN1 is not terminated at this pcb.

Plug-in pcb 4

TB3

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

TP23

1 Alarm out 1 make (normally open) 2 Alarm out 1 centre 3 Alarm out 1 break (normally closed) 4 Alarm out 2 make (not used) 5 Alarm out 2 centre (not used) 6 Alarm out 2 break (not used) The relays are switched on if the pcb is working!

TP12

ztr1_624.jpg

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

6.3

ON Function OFF = COM Expander 1 ON = COM Expander 2 Manufacturer‘s use, must be OFF (default) No function (default = OFF) Manufacturer‘s use, must be OFF (default)

J7

Function

1 2 3 4 5/6 7/8

CAN1 A to J5, Interconnection Board CAN1 A to J5, Interconnection Board CAN1 B to J5, Interconnection Board CAN1 B to J5, Interconnection Board 5 connected to 6 7 connected to 8

COM Expander pcb

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

Radar Data Converter (RDC) GE3044G219

DIP Switch S1/1...4, Indicator Number On=closed=0; off=open=1

DIP Switch S1/5...8

Switch No.

Sets Indicator No. to 1

4

3

2

1

On

On

On

On

Sets Indicator No. to 2

On

On

On

Off

Sets Indicator No. to 3

On

On

Off

On

Sets Indicator No. to 4

On

On

Off

Off

Sets Indicator No. to 5

On

Off

On

On

All other settings are not admissible

1)

TP162 1/2

Speaker TP161 E15 E20 E2 TP151 TP152 TP162 DS4 DS6 DS5 DS7 1

1

1

1

1 E28 1 E25

J2

1 1

ON

OFF

Boot from IDE memory module (default)

Boot from diskette drive (the software update routine is started while booting).

6

Monitor resolution 1024x768

Monitor resolution 1280x1024

7

Monitor frequency 72 Hz

Monitor frequency 60 Hz

8

Normal operation (default)

Service mode on 1)

See section S e r v i c e S w i t c h o f t h e R D C on page 57. Settings for the different Monitor Types

TP161 = CAN0, TP162 = CAN1 Jumper on 1/2 = CAN bus terminated No jumper on 1/2 = CAN bus not terminated See also Section 4.3 on page 42.

1

Function

5

CAN Bus Termination TP161 1/2

8

Monitor

S1/6

S1/7

Monitor

S1/6

S1/7

AZ3069G040

Off

Off

AZ3066G040

On

Off

AZ3063G04x/5x

Off

Off

AZ3056G04x

Off

Off

AZ3068G04x/5x

Off

Off

AZ3065G040

Off

Off

S1 E10/ 1 E11 1 1

DS8 DS10 DS2 E18 DS9 DS1 DS3 E1

E4

DS12 DS11 DS13

1

1

1

1 E27

1

E14

E16

1

1

ztr1_623.jpg

1

E17

1

1 E12 1

1 E26

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

6.3.2

6.3 Important Hardware Components

E19

TP103 TP102 TP101 TP100

Termination of Serial interface 4 Serial interface 3 Serial interface 2 Serial interface 1

E5 E3, ext. reset contact

Motherboard ztr1_011.jpg

J4

E5/2 E5/1 E20/1

Fig. 6-17

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

RDC pcb

175

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

Technical Manual

6.3 Important Hardware Components

Analog Interface (AI) GE3044G207 For the installation of a retrofit kit, see Section 5.15.

TB

Function

10 AIS RxD, Input 11 AIS RxD, Input + 12 Do not connect! 13 Do not connect! 14 AIS TxD, Output 15 AIS TxD Output + 16 AIS GND (≥Rev 03 only)

J1

RS422 Interface

Connector for SH3014G203, RS422 interface (≥Rev 03 only)

Function Alarm out 1, make Alarm out 1, centre Alarm out 1, break Alarm out 2, make Alarm out 2, centre Alarm out 2, break

TB

Function

30 31 32 33

ST1 status input for gyro ST1 status input for gyro ST2 status input for log ST2 status input for log

TP5

TP1 TP74

1 TB10 TB11 TB12 TB13 TB14 TB15 TB16

TB25 TB24 TB23 TB22 TB21 TB20

TB40 TB41 TB42 TB43 TB44 TB45 TB30 TB31 TB32 TB33

TP78

TB 40 41 42 43 44 45

TB1 TB2 TB3 TB4 TB5 TB6 TB7 TB8

Termination

Jumper on 1/2 = termination of CAN1 (Navigation Bus). No jumper on 1/2 = CAN1 is not terminated at this pcb.

TP99

Addresses

Set jumper on 7/8 to address Analog Interface No. 1 (default) Set jumper on 6/7 to address Analog Interface No. 2 (if also a second Analog Interface is installed)

TP75

TP90

TP70 TB52, PE TB51, N TB50, L1

1

1 1

1

1 1

1

1

TB

Function

TB

Function

25 24

Common (stepper) Gyro REF 2 / reference common (synchro) Gyro REF 1 (synchro) Gyro T Gyro S Gyro R

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Log SP (supply output for zero potential contacts) Log BT (Bottom Track) Log WT (Water Track) Log XPM (+/- longitudinal speed) Log YPM (+/- transversal speed (drift)) Log VX (speed) Log VY (speed transversal (drift)) Log GND

23 22 21 20

Fig. 6-18

176

F1

1

ztr1_080.jpg

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

6.3.3

DS34 DS35 DS7 DS36 DS33 DS37

7

J7

TP2

break = normally closed (n.c.) make = normally opened (n.o.)

Analog Interface ≥Rev. 03

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

Connection of Log and Gyro

LOG 1-axis log connection to Radar

Analog Interface TB 8 GND (common) 6 VX (speed)

2-Axis Log connection to Radar Analog Interface TB 8 GND (common) 7 VY (drift) 6 VX (speed) 5 LOG YPM (+/-Y) 4 LOG XPM (+/-X) 3 WT (Water Track) 2 BT (Bottom Track) 1 Log SP

GYRO 1.) DC Stepper System ( common - ground ) +

Analog Interface DS 33, 34, 35 TB are flashing green 20 21 22 25

+

Analog Interface DS 33, 34, 35 TB are flashing red 20 21 22 25

In DC stepper systems, the signals can be switched by mechanical contacts or also by semiconductors. See the following example:

ztr1_124.eps

DC stepper system ( common - high )

4.) DC Stepper System ( common - high )

-

Analog Interface DS 33, 34, 35 TB are flashing green 20 21 22 25

R S T common

Parameter Analog Gyro System = “DC Stepper Positive”

AC System 50 Hz AC System 60 Hz

Analog Interface TB 20 21 22 25

R S T common

Parameter Analog Gyro System = “DC Stepper Negative”

R S T common

Parameter Analog Gyro System = “DC Stepper Negative”

Analog Interface DS 33, 34, 35 TB are flashing red 20 21 22 25

R S T common

Parameter Analog Gyro System = “DC Stepper Positive”

3.) DC stepper system ( common - high )

2.) DC stepper system ( common - ground ) -

R S T common

Analog Interface TB 23 REF 1 20 R 21 S 22 T 24 REF 2 (reference common)

Gyro (Synchro)

+(-) Gyro Fig. 6-19

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

Connection of log and gyro

177

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

6.3 Important Hardware Components

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

6 Setting-To-Work Guide

Technical Manual

6.3 Important Hardware Components

TB 2, Alarm Contacts

TB3

19 = TB3/5 18 = TB3/5 17 = TB3/5 Double End Ferry: 15, 16 closed = AFT 15, 16 opened = FWD Audio Alarm Ack.: 14 Alarm Ack. M 13 Alarm Ack. P Chart Alarm: 12 AL_out4 make 11 AL_out4 centre 10 AL_out4 break Target Alarm: (ARPA/AIS Alarm) 9 AL_out3 make 8 AL_out3 centre 7 AL_out3 break Dead Man Alarm Trig: 6 AL_out2 make 5 AL_out2 centre 4 AL_out2 break Radar Alarm: 3 AL_out1 make 2 AL_out1 centre 1 AL_out1 break

The alarm contacts are provided by the RDC. See the RDC description for technical data and configuration.

15 24V ON/OFF ONN 14 24V ON/OFF ONP 13 24V ON/OFF ONN 12 24V ON/OFF ONP 11 CAN0_A (IN) 10 CAN0_B (IN) 9 CAN1_A (IN) 8 CAN1_B (IN) 7 CAN0_A (OUT) 6 CAN0_B (OUT) 5 CAN_GND 4 CAN1_A (OUT) 3 CAN1_B (OUT) 2 24V ON/OFF ONN 1 24V ON/OFF ONP IN and OUT for the CAN-Bus are identical.

TB18 Function For Remote Keyboard Electronics 6 CAN_KBC GND 5 CAN_KBC GND 4 CAN_KBC B Out -> 3 CAN_KBC A Out -> 2 CAN_KBC B in Versions of the System Maintenance Manager. The software version of the component must be compatible with the software versions of all other components. If this is not the case, a pcb software update must be performed as described in Section 5.12.1.6 on page 144. For further information about the software versions, see the "Software Change Notes" and "Technotes" (also available via internet).

7.

The Analog Interface contains a number of parameters. These parameters are also stored in the RDC and on the hard-disk of the MULTIPILOT. When the radar is started, the parameters are automatically sent from the hard-disk or the RDC to the Analog Interface.

8.6.10

Exchange of the COM Expander To exchange the COM Expander, open the Interconnection Box. Switch off the radar and disconnect it from the mains.

194

1.

Mark the cables with the terminal numbers before disconnecting them. Disconnect all cables and connectors from the COM Expander.

2.

Remove all plug-in adapter pcbs from the defective pcb and connect them to the corresponding slot of the spare part.

3.

The COM Expander is fixed with 4 screws. Unscrew these screws and remove the pcb.

4.

Set the jumpers on the new COM Expander pcb to the same positions as on the defective pcb.

5.

Fix the new pcb by means of the screws and connect all cables.

6.

Switch on the power to the radar.

7.

Check the software version of the component by means of the menu Telemonitoring Data > Versions of the System Maintenance Manager. The software version of the component must be compatible with the software versions of all other components. If this is not the case, a pcb software update must be performed as described in Section 5.12.1.6 on page 144. For further information about the software versions, see the "Software Change Notes" and "Technotes" (also available via internet).

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05

8 Repair/Maintenance

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

8.

8.6.11

8.6 Exchange of Parts and Testing

The COM Expander contains a number of parameters. These parameters are also stored in the RDC and on the hard-disk of the MULTIPILOT. When the radar is started, the parameters are sent from the hard-disk or the RDC to the Analog Interface automatically.

Exchange of the Diskette Drive To exchange the diskette drive, the drive unit must be removed as described in Section 5.1 from page 86 on.

ztr1_200.jpg

For the correct connection of the data cable at the diskette drive, see Figure 8-5.

Fig. 8-5

8.6.12

Connection of the data cable at the diskette drive

Exchange of the Electronics Unit’s Power Supply To exchange the power supply, switch off the radar, disconnect the mains supply cable and open the Display Electronics Unit. 1.

Disconnect all supply cables (power supply output).

2.

The power supply unit is mounted by means of 4 screws. Two of them must be removed at the rear (outside) of the electronics unit housing; the other two screws must be removed inside the housing.

3.

Fix the new power supply by means of the screws and connect the supply cables.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05

195

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

8 Repair/Maintenance

Technical Manual

8.6 Exchange of Parts and Testing

8.6.13

Exchange of Filter Pads The filter pad of the Display Electronics Unit’s housing must be changed or washed with a mild detergent every 3 months. If the Display Electronics Unit is installed in a dusty environment, the replacement or cleaning must be done more often. The filter pad can be exchanged without tools. It is trapped under the metal cover of the Display Electronics Unit’s fan outlet. Remove it at the cover corner which is not fixed by a screw. The part number of the filter pad is: GE3044T030, order No. 2175640.

ztr1_062.jpg

Washed filter pads must be allowed to dry completely.

Location of the filter pad

8.6.14

Exchange of Fans

8.6.14.1

Exchange of the Fan of the Display Electronics Unit Housing

To remove the fan, open the cover of the housing. Disconnect the fan and unscrew the four nuts on the housing of the fan. Exchange the fan and fix the new one with the four nuts. Connect the fan to the supply and close the housing of the Display Electronics Unit. It is advisable to check the filter pad (see Section 8.6.13) on this occasion.

8.6.14.2

Exchange of the Processor Fan

If the fan of the main processor of the motherboard is defective, it is possible that the main processor itself is damaged, too. The function of the main processor should be tested. Depending on the type of processor, the lifetime of this component can be reduced drastically or destroyed within a few minutes if it is allowed to run without a fan. The method of exchanging the fan depends on the main processor type. Usually, the fan is fixed with metal clamps which can be opened carefully by means of a small screwdriver. The fan must be connected to a 3-pole connector on the motherboard next to the processor socket. This connector is marked by a printed label on the motherboard pcb. NOTE: At present, spare parts are delivered as a kit consisting of the main processor, the motherboard, the fan and the memory modules; see the Section S p a r e P a r t s on page 197.

196

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05

8 Repair/Maintenance

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

8.7

8.7 Maintenance

Maintenance Maintenance Schedule The maintenance of the radar is limited to the following tasks: Work

Interval

Remarks

Exchanging or cleaning the filter pad of the Display Electronics Unit

Every 3 months, depending on the dustiness of the environment; operator’s maintenance work

Nevertheless, it makes sense to check the pad whenever maintenance or repair work has to be done.

Checking the housing fan and the CPU fan of the electronics unit

Whenever maintenance or repair work has been done

Exchanging the CMOS backup battery

Every 5 years.

See the hints in Section 8.6.4 on page 192.

It is not necessary to exchange the gear lubricant oil.

8.8

Spare Parts

8.8.1

Spare Part Concept Most of the components in the Display Electronics Unit are parts which cannot be serviced. In the case of a defect, the complete part must be exchanged.

8.8.2

Spare Parts List Some of the components of the Display Electronics Unit in particular will be modified at short intervals, so that it is likely that it will not be possible to deliver spare parts which are absolutely identical to the original part. In such cases, a Technote for the exchange is delivered with the spare part and new versions of components are added to this manual as soon as possible. Electronics Unit GE3066/GE3064/GE3065 Part

Order No.

Motherboard with 1000 MHz Main Processor, Fan and Memory Module (Motherboard DFI CA64-TN) (GE3044G066)

300006104

ATX Power Supply (FSP300-60FPN)

300004624

Fan (3412N for Electronics Unit Housing)

5035335

Filter pad (GE3044T030, 110x110 mm) for Electronics Unit

2175640

Ethernet Module with Y-plug (LCS-8034TB)

300006169

Graphics and Video Processor (GVP) pcb (GE3044G213)

300006090

RDC pcb (GE3044G219)

300005324

Set of Cables GE3044 (GE3062G005)

390001276

DVD-ROM drive (CD-ROM drive), MULTIPILOT only

390001331

Hard Disk Drive (40 GByte)

390000261

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05

197

8 Repair/Maintenance 8.8 Spare Parts

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

Part

Order No.

Connector (female, supplying Operating Unit / Diskette Drive, T3303100)

5321296

CMOS backup battery CR2032

271126851

IDE Module with software (GE3062G001)

390002052

Interconnection Box VS3034 Part

Order No.

Interconnection Board (GE3044G216)

300005044

Fuse Kit (VS3034G005)

390001271

Fuse, Analog Interface, F1, 0.5 A, slow blow

5070558

Fuses, Interconnection Board F1, 6.3 A, slow blow F2, 6.3 A, slow blow F3, 4.0 A, slow blow F4, 0.1 A, slow blow F5, 1.0 A, slow blow

5071038 5071038 5073585 5070551 5070561

COM Expander (GE3044G210)

300004738

Analog Interface pcb (Gyro/Log Interface, GE3044G207)

2571304

Analog Interface Kit (GE3044G059, Log/Gyro Interface)

2576100

RGB Buffer Kit (GE3044G062)

390000923

Plug-in pcb TTL (GE3044G211)

300004562

Plug-in pcb 20 mA current loop (TTY) (GE3044G212)

300004561

Plug-in pcb RS232 (GE3044G214)

300004560

Plug-in pcb RS422/RS485 (GE3044G218)

300004559

Modification Kit for Plug-in Adapter pcbs (VS3034G005)

390002198

Operating Unit BD3027 Part

Order No.

Trackball Unit (0821/01)

5933832

EMC Cover (0821/01-07-00)

5930872

Radar Keyboard (0822/01)

5933833

TRACKPILOT Keyboard (0832/01)

5933831

Keyboard Controller GE3048G200

300004763

Fuse for GE3048G200, F1, 2.0 A, slow blow (SMD, 0454 002)

300005060

Diskette Drive Kit (AZ 3053 G 001) for Operating Unit

2776186

Trackball BD3028

198

Part

Order No.

Trackball Unit (0821/01)

5933832

EMC Cover (0821/01-07-00)

5930872

Diskette Drive Kit (AZ 3053 G 001) for Operating Unit

2776186

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

8 Repair/Maintenance

Technical Manual

8.8 Spare Parts

Interswitch (PCI)

8.8.3

Part

Order No.

Processor Controlled Interswitch Board (PCI, NG3013G205)

1894740

Spare Parts for Monitors The spare parts lists for the monitors are contained in the monitor service manuals. If a monitor is not intended for service/repair, a separate technical manual is not available for this monitor.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05

199

8 Repair/Maintenance 8.8 Spare Parts

200

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05

9 Technical Data

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

9.1 Conformity to Standards, Environmental Conditions

9

Technical Data

9.1

Conformity to Standards, Environmental Conditions The Gearboxes and Scanners comply with DIN EN 60945 (Maritime navigation and radiocommunication equipment and systems - General requirements - Methods of testing and required test results). The system of protection required for the Gearbox by DIN EN 60945 is not valid for internal parts of the Gearbox. All components, except of the Scanner and the Gearbox (in Version A including the Transceiver Electronics Unit) belong to the category "protected from the weather". The Scanner and the Gearbox (in version A including the Transceiver Electronics Unit) belong to the category "exposed to the weather".

9.2

Performance

9.2.1

Performance Data of the Radar Data Converter (RDC) GE3044G219

General Characteristics -

CMOS RAM with 32 kB 4 serial interfaces RS422 4 alarm outputs, 2 alarm inputs 2 CAN bus interfaces for Radar Bus and Nav Bus

Characteristics of the Radar Video Processing -

Possible RPM of the antenna: Max. ship’s speed: Max. ship’s rate of turn: Pulse length: Azimuth resolution: Transformation: Max. PRF for receiving: Max. PRF for processing: Ranges:

-

Off-centre range: X/Y memory: DSP clock frequency: Video transmission to GVP:

23 RPM, 28 RPM, 46 RPM, 56 RPM 70 kt 1200°/min variable from 80 to 1000 ns 1024 sweeps/circle = 0.35° 1024 sweeps/360° 4 kHz 2 kHz 0.25 / 0.5 / 0.75 / 1.5 / 3 / 6 / 12 / 24 / 48 / 96 NM and additionally two metric ranges with 250 / 500 m max. 75% 1024x1024x8 bit 50 Mhz 15 Hz or higher

Characteristic of the ARPA Functionality Tracks -

Maximum number of targets: Range: Max. speed (HSC, IEC 80/149 (936-2) D.1):

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e09.fm / 06.09.05

50 20 NM true 70 kt

201

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

9 Technical Data

Technical Manual

9.2 Performance

Manual -

target acquisition Min. distance: Max. distance: Time until track stable: Time until course and speed stable:

Automatic target acquisition: Min. distance: Max. distance: • Number of target acquisition rings: • Number of target acquisition sectors:

0.5 NM 20 NM 2 2

Maximum own ship’s speed:

70 kt

9.2.2

Performance Data of the Graphics and Video Processor GE3044G213 -

9.2.3

Resolution: Vertical refresh rate: Color depth: Bus frequency:

at least 1024 x 768 and 1280 x 1024 pixels at least 70 Hz in all resolutions at least 256 colours compatible with 100 MHz bus

Performance Data of the Analog Interface -

-

9.2.4

Microcontroller Siemens SAB 80C167CR with the following specifications: 2 kB internal RAM 2 kB XRAM 56 interrupt sources with 16 possible priority levels and separate interrupt vectors 16 A/D converters 9 timers (16 bit) 2 serial interfaces Programmable watchdog timer Bootstrap loader CAN controller Data memory 128 k x 8 bit RAM Parameter memory 256 k x 6 bit EEPROM Program memory 128 k x 8 bit flash-ROM AIS interface (RS422) (≥Rev.03)

Performance Data of the RGB Buffer GE3044G222 (optional) -

Maximum resolution: Maximum vertical refresh rate: Maximum horizontal rate: Pixel clock:

1280 x 1024 pixels 75 Hz 80 kHz 135 MHz

Current consumption of the RGB Buffer board:

202

0.01 NM 20 NM about 10 turns about 15 turns

about 190 mA

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e09.fm / 06.09.05

9 Technical Data

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

9.2.5

9.2 Performance

Performance Data of the Electronics Unit’s Power Supply The power supply units conform to the ATX specification. -

Mains voltage:

115 V / 230 V (switchable or automatic full range)

FSP300-60PFN: -

Max. mains consumption: Output power: Output voltages/currents: Voltage

Current

+3.3 V

28.0 A

+5 V

30.0 A

+12 V

15.0 A

-12 V

0.8 A

-5 V

0.3 A

+5 V stand-by

2.0 A

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e09.fm / 06.09.05

115 V/10 A, 230 V/5 A, 50...60 Hz 300 W

203

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

9 Technical Data

Technical Manual

9.3 External Interfaces

9.3

External Interfaces The Antenna Unit and the Transceiver have no external interfaces. The interfaces of the Display Electronics Unit are described in Section 4.5.9. For the IEC 61162 interfaces, see the corresponding service manual.

9.3.1

Analog Interface The interfaces for the analog gyro (AC gyro or DC stepper) and the pulse log can be parameterized for different systems. For further information about the Analog Interface, see Section 4.5.10. The gyro interface is equipped with a status input ST1, which can be used as an external error input. If no signal is measured at the status input, no error is recognized.

9.3.1.1

Analog Gyro

Input voltage ranges: Bearing resolution: Sensor type: Reference frequency:

9.3.1.2

35 V (set by parameterization) 1/6° (typical) or 1/3° AC, DC 50 Hz, 60 Hz

Pulse Log

Number of axes: Number of pulses per NM: Inversion of the following signals is possible:

1 (X-axis) or 2 (X-, Y-axis) 125, 200 BT, WT, XPM, YPM, VX, VY

The pulse log interface has the following additional status inputs:

9.3.2

Input

Function

XPM

X-axis, speed direction. For zero potential contacts. Polarity and internal (20 mA) / external voltage can be configured in the service menus.

YPM

Y-axis, speed direction. For zero potential contacts. Polarity and internal (20 mA) / external voltage can be configured in the service menus.

BT

Bottom track. For zero potential contacts. Polarity and internal (20 mA) / external voltage can be configured in the service menus.

WT

Water track. For zero potential contacts. Polarity and internal (20 mA) / external voltage can be configured in the service menus.

ST2

External input for log error. Can be configured for zero potential contact or 20 mA optocoupler input by jumper settings. See Section 4.5.10.

COM Expander 4 serial interfaces which can be converted individually by means of plug-in adapter pcbs to RS232/ RS422/RS485/TTL/TTY.

204

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e09.fm / 06.09.05

9 Technical Data

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

9.4 Power Supply

9.4

Power Supply

9.4.1

Display Electronics Unit The mains supply required for the monitor depends on the type of monitor. See the monitor service manual. The keyboards are supplied with power by the Display Electronics Unit. The maximum power consumption of the power supply of the Display Electronics Unit is about 115 V / 7.4 A or 230 V / 4 A. The ATX power supply unit has a maximum power output of 350 W.

9.4.1.1

Operating Unit

The Operating Unit must be supplied with power via the PS/2 connector and the keyboard illumination must be supplied with power via an additional cable from the Display Electronics Unit. The voltage supply is:

5 V DC ±10%

The following currents have been measured: -

9.5

All LEDs at max. brightness Without background illumination, status display at max. brightness Without background illumination and status display

490 mA 110 mA 50 mA

Dimensions and Weights For dimensions and weights, see the technical drawings. The drawings are shown in Section 13.

9.6

Compass Safe Distances

Standard compass

Steering compass

Standard compass reduced

Steering compass reduced

BD3028 Trackball

2.50 m

1.30 m

Desktop Unit 19", AZ3068

2.25 m

1.10 m

1.35 m

0.70 m

Desktop Unit 23.1", AZ3063

2.50 m

1.50 m

1.50 m

0.90 m

GE3062, GE3064, GE3065 Electronics Unit

0.45 m

0.30 m

0.30 m

0.30 m

Interconnection Box

0.50 m

0.40 m

0.30 m

0.30 m

GE3041 Interswitch

1.50 m

0.90 m

0.90 m

0.55 m

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e09.fm / 06.09.05

205

9 Technical Data 9.6 Compass Safe Distances

206

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e09.fm / 06.09.05

10 System Faults

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

10

System Faults

10.1

System Fault Messages

10.1 System Fault Messages

The following system faults are indicated by means of texts but not by means of codes.

10.2

Error

Description

CONFIG TP SPECIAL DIFFER (additional acoustic signal)

The "Special Parameters" saved in this Indicator do not correspond with the parameters saved in the TRACKPILOT. The TRACKPILOT electronics unit might not be configured correctly.

CONFIG TP SYSTEM DIFFER (additional acoustic signal)

The "System Parameters" saved in this Indicator do not correspond with the parameters saved in the TRACKPILOT. The TRACKPILOT electronics unit might not be configured correctly.

CONFIG TP USER DIFFER (additional acoustic signal)

The "User Parameters" saved in this Indicator do not correspond with the parameters saved in the TRACKPILOT. The TRACKPILOT electronics unit might not be configured correctly.

CONFIG TP INTERFACE DIFFER (additional acoustic signal)

The "Interface Basic Setup" parameters saved in this Indicator do not correspond with the parameters saved in the TRACKPILOT. The TRACKPILOT electronics unit might not be configured correctly.

CONFIG TP ADVANCED DIFFER (additional acoustic signal)

The "Advanced Parameters" saved in this Indicator do not correspond with the parameters saved in the TRACKPILOT. The TRACKPILOT electronics unit might not be configured correctly.

CONFIG TP RUDDER 1&2 DIFFER (additional acoustic signal)

The "Rudder 1&2 or Azimuth Thruster 1&2" parameters saved in this Indicator do not correspond with the parameters saved in the TRACKPILOT. The TRACKPILOT electronics unit might not be configured correctly.

CONFIG EI PARAM. DIFFER (additional acoustic signal)

The Engine Interface parameters saved in this Indicator do not correspond with the parameters saved in the TRACKPILOT. The TRACKPILOT electronics unit might not be configured correctly.

NEW INDICATOR CONFIG FILE

A new set of parameters has been transmitted to the Indicator from a second Indicator. The message cannot be acknowledged. It disappears when the Indicator has been restarted and therefore the new set of parameters is in use.

INTERSWITCH ADJUST

The Interswitch (PCI) is switched to service mode.

INDICATOR SERVICE SWITCH

The Indicator of this radar is switched to service mode (hardware switch). Programming of parameters and system configuration is possible.

AIS Faults If a UAIS DEBEG 3400 electronics unit is connected, see the technical manual of the AIS electronics unit for further information.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

207

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

10 System Faults

Technical Manual

10.3 System Fault Code List

10.3

System Fault Code List The system fault codes are constantly under development. This list will be updated as often as possible. The list also contains the fault codes for the Transceiver Electronics Unit. Abbreviations:

General: CRC DMA EOT LEC NAK NMEA

208

Cyclic Redundancy Check Direct Memory Access End Of Text Last Error Code Negative Acknowledge National Marine Electronics Association (standard for interfacing marine electronic devices)

PCB PROM QUEUE ROT SIO WIND

Printed Circuit Board Programmable Read-Only Memory Kind of FIFO Memory Rate-Of-Turn Sensor Serial Input Output (Serial COMM Port)

Devices: AIS

AIS system, see AIS manuals

NAVBUS

ARPA

Automatic Radar Plotting Aid (RDC)

PCI

CFG FSYS GYRO LAN MDB MON MSI

Configuration File System Non NMEA serial gyro systems LAN Network Track Data Base Monitor Analog Interface (Gyro/Log I/F) PCB

RDC RKE SI9600 SP TP TRM

CAN1 Bus Interswitch (Processor Controlled Interswitch) Radar Data Converter Remote Keyboard Electronics Ship’s Interface SPEEDPILOT TRACKPILOT Transceiver (CUT/TCU)

GYRO IND

Gyro Radar Indicator (Display Electronic Unit)

Wind Sensor

Subdevices: ADC Analog/Digital Converter BITE Built-In Test Equipment CAN-KBC (Remote Keyboard Electronics CAN_KB CAN-Bus) CAN0 Radar Bus CAN1 Navigation Bus COMM Communication (generic) CONFIG Configuration (System Configuration) Conrac Monitor Manufacturer CPOOL Memory Pool DEPTH Depth Sensor DOLOG DOLOG Sensor DPM Dual-Ported Memory DRIVER Device Driver DRV Driver

IVSC

Part of RDC PCB

LOG MC MPS POS PROM PS/2 QUEUE RAM ROM ROT SIO

DSP

Digital Signal Processor

SYSTEM

EEPROM

Electrically Erasable PROM

UART

Log Sensor Microcontroller Map Planning Station (Planning System) Position Sensor Programmable Read-Only Memory PS/2 interface Queue System Random Access Memory Read Only Memory Rate of Turn Serial Input/Output Internal system resources (e.g. CPU timer) UART

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

10 System Faults

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

10.3 System Fault Code List

System Faults: Error 00131 00132 00133 00134 00135 00136 00137 00138 00139

Device FSYS FSYS FSYS FSYS FSYS FSYS FSYS FSYS FSYS

Subdevice Info Root filesystem checksum error File system error 2 File system error 3 File system error 4 File system error 5 File system error 6 File system error 7 File system error 8 File system error 9

00141 00142 00143

CFG CFG CFG

CONFIG CONFIG CONFIG

configuration file R10k.sam corrupt configuration file R10k.sam was corrupt bad chart function license key

00501 00502 00503 00504 00505 00506 00507 00508 00509 00511 00512 00513 00521 00522 00523 00524 00531 00532 00533

RSC1 RSC1 RSC1 RSC1 RSC1 RSC1 RSC1 RSC1 RSC1 RSC1 RSC1 RSC1 RSC1 RSC1 RSC1 RSC1 RSC1 RSC1 RSC1

DRIVER DRIVER COMM COMM COMM COMM COMM COMM COMM DSP1 DSP1 DSP1 DSP2 DSP2 DSP2 DSP2 IVSC IVSC IVSC

device not found video DMA timeout timeout error timeout warning receive pool empty send pool empty received unmatched message type received unexpected message reset timeout error startup BITE failure PCI-Bus overrun PCI-DMA failure startup BITE failure sweep DMA overrun antenna azimuth step overflow sweep read timeout TVA sync start error TVA antenna azimuth data error control fault

00601 00602 00603 00604 00605 00606

MON1 MON1 MON1 MON1 MON1 MON1

Ser1 Ser1 Ser1 Ser1 Ser1 Ser1

NAK received EOT not found checksum error invalid telegram invalid command timeout, or monitor switched off

01101 01102 01103 01104 01105 01106 01107 01108 01111 01112 01113 01115

RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1

SIO1 SIO1 SIO1 SIO1 SIO1 SIO1 SIO1 SIO1 SIO1 SIO1 SIO1 SIO1

receive pool empty receive FIFO full receive buffer insufficient send pool empty send FIFO full send buffer insufficient illegal interrupt unexpected transmit interrupt binary: lost block binary: lost bytes binary: checksum error gyro: lost bytes

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

Recommended Action

209

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

10 System Faults

Technical Manual

10.3 System Fault Code List

210

Error 01117 01121 01122 01123

Device RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1

Subdevice SIO1 SIO1 SIO1 SIO1

Info STXETX: lost bytes chip: overrun error chip: parity error chip: framing error

01201 01202 01203 01204 01205 01206 01207 01208 01211 01212 01213 01215 01217 01221 01222 01223

RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1

SIO2 SIO2 SIO2 SIO2 SIO2 SIO2 SIO2 SIO2 SIO2 SIO2 SIO2 SIO2 SIO2 SIO2 SIO2 SIO2

receive pool empty receive FIFO full receive buffer insufficient send pool empty send FIFO full send buffer insufficient illegal interrupt unexpected transmit interrupt binary: lost block binary: lost bytes binary: checksum error gyro: lost bytes STXETX: lost bytes chip: overrun error chip: parity error chip: framing error

01301 01302 01303 01304 01305 01306 01307 01308 01311 01312 01313 01315 01317 01321 01322 01323

RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1

SIO3 SIO3 SIO3 SIO3 SIO3 SIO3 SIO3 SIO3 SIO3 SIO3 SIO3 SIO3 SIO3 SIO3 SIO3 SIO3

receive pool empty receive FIFO full receive buffer insufficient send pool empty send FIFO full send buffer insufficient illegal interrupt unexpected transmit interrupt binary: lost block binary: lost bytes binary: checksum error gyro: lost bytes STXETX: lost bytes chip: overrun error chip: parity error chip: framing error

01401 01402 01403 01404 01405 01406 01407 01408 01411 01412 01413 01415 01417 01421 01422

RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1

SIO4 SIO4 SIO4 SIO4 SIO4 SIO4 SIO4 SIO4 SIO4 SIO4 SIO4 SIO4 SIO4 SIO4 SIO4

receive pool empty receive FIFO full receive buffer insufficient send pool empty send FIFO full send buffer insufficient illegal interrupt unexpected transmit interrupt binary: lost block binary: lost bytes binary: checksum error gyro: lost bytes STXETX: lost bytes chip: overrun error chip: parity error

Recommended Action

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

10 System Faults

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

10.3 System Fault Code List

Error 01423

Device RDC1

Subdevice Info SIO4 chip: framing error

01501 01502 01503 01504 01505 01506 01507 01508 01511 01512 01513 01514 01515 01516 01517 01521 01522 01523 01524 01525 01526 01527 01528 01529

RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1

CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0

initialization error receive pool empty receive FIFO full receive buffer insufficient send pool empty send FIFO full send buffer insufficient unexpected transmit interrupt lost message message checksum error lost frame illegal frame type transmit request hang ghost interrupt receive overrun chip: warning chip: bus off chip: LEC: no error chip: LEC: stuff error chip: LEC: form error chip: LEC: acknowledge error chip: LEC: bit 1 error chip: LEC: bit 0 error chip: LEC: CRC error

01601 01602 01603 01604 01605 01606 01607 01608 01611 01612 01613 01614 01615 01616 01617 01621 01622 01623 01624 01625 01626 01627 01628 01629

RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1

CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1

initialization error receive pool empty receive FIFO full receive buffer insufficient send pool empty send FIFO full send buffer insufficient unexpected transmit interrupt lost message message checksum error lost frame illegal frame type transmit request hang ghost interrupt receive overrun chip: warning chip: bus off chip: LEC: no error chip: LEC: stuff error chip: LEC: form error chip: LEC: acknowledge error chip: LEC: bit 1 error chip: LEC: bit 0 error chip: LEC: CRC error

01801 01802

LAN1 LAN1

DRV DRV

send fifo full (generic) send fifo full (AIS)

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

Recommended Action

211

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

10 System Faults

Technical Manual

10.3 System Fault Code List

212

Error 01810 01811 01820 01821

Device LAN1 LAN1 LAN1 LAN1

Subdevice DRV DRV DRV DRV

01851 01860 01870

PIXMAP DRV PIXMAP DRV PIXMAP DRV

send fifo full send error receive error

01901 01902

MDB MDB

system track read error track catalog read error

02011 02012 02013 02014 02015 02021 02022 02100 02124 02125 02130 02131 02132 02133 02134 02135 02136 02137 02138 02139 02140 02141 02142 02143 02144 02145 02146 02147 02148 02149 02150 02151 02152 02153 02154 02155 02156 02157 02158 02159 02160 02161

TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM

COMM COMM COMM COMM COMM CONFIG CONFIG SYSTEM RAM ROM IND1 IND2 IND3 IND4 IND5 IND1 IND2 IND3 IND4 IND5 IND1 IND2 IND3 IND4 IND5 IND1 IND2 IND3 IND4 IND5 IND1 IND2 IND3 IND4 IND5 IND1 IND2 IND3 IND4 IND5 IND1 IND2

Info send error (generic) send error (AIS) receive error (generic) receive error (AIS)

Recommended Action

checkword timeout checkword error protocol failure receive failure send failure X/S-Band mismatch generation mismatch (R9600/R1000) clock failure error error invalid message type invalid message type invalid message type invalid message type invalid message type setup data 1 incomplete setup data 1 incomplete setup data 1 incomplete setup data 1 incomplete setup data 1 incomplete invalid sector count value invalid sector count value invalid sector count value invalid sector count value invalid sector count value transmit data timeout transmit data timeout transmit data timeout transmit data timeout transmit data timeout invalid frequency deviation invalid frequency deviation invalid frequency deviation invalid frequency deviation invalid frequency deviation reset handling error reset handling error reset handling error reset handling error reset handling error plausibility check failed plausibility check failed

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

10 System Faults

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

Error 02162 02163 02164 02165 02166 02167 02168 02169 02170 02171 02172 02173 02174 02175 02176 02177 02178 02179 02180 02181 02182 02183 02184 02185 02186 02187 02188 02189 02190 02191 02192 02193 02194 02195 02196 02197 02198 02199 02200 02201 02202 02203 02204 02205 02206 02207 02208 02209 02210 02211 02212 02213 02214 02215

10.3 System Fault Code List

Device TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

Subdevice IND3 IND4 IND5 IND1 IND2 IND3 IND4 IND5 IND1 IND2 IND3 IND4 IND5 IND1 IND2 IND3 IND4 IND5 IND1 IND2 IND3 IND4 IND5 IND1 IND2 IND3 IND4 IND5 IND1 IND2 IND3 IND4 IND5 IND1 IND2 IND3 IND4 IND5 IND1 IND2 IND3 IND4 IND5 IND1 IND2 IND3 IND4 IND5 IND1 IND2 IND3 IND4 IND5 IND1

Info plausibility check failed plausibility check failed plausibility check failed setup data absent setup data absent setup data absent setup data absent setup data absent checkword error checkword error checkword error checkword error checkword error checkword timeout checkword timeout checkword timeout checkword timeout checkword timeout invalid transmit data invalid transmit data invalid transmit data invalid transmit data invalid transmit data invalid mode request invalid mode request invalid mode request invalid mode request invalid mode request invalid indicator number invalid indicator number invalid indicator number invalid indicator number invalid indicator number invalid PM parameter invalid PM parameter invalid PM parameter invalid PM parameter invalid PM parameter setup data 1 incomplete setup data 1 incomplete setup data 1 incomplete setup data 1 incomplete setup data 1 incomplete invalid PM video (PMV) threshold invalid PM video (PMV) threshold invalid PM video (PMV) threshold invalid PM video (PMV) threshold invalid PM video (PMV) threshold setup data 2 absent setup data 2 absent setup data 2 absent setup data 2 absent setup data 2 absent invalid SEA (STC) curve

Recommended Action

213

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

10 System Faults

Technical Manual

10.3 System Fault Code List

214

Error 02216 02217 02218 02219 02220 02221 02222 02223 02224 02270 02271 02272 02274 02275 02276 02277 02278 02279

Device TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM

02280

TRM

02281 02300 02301 02302 02303 02304 02305 02310 02311 02312 02313 02314 02315 02316 02317 02318 02319 02320 02321 02322 02405 02406 02407 02410 02411 02412

TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM

Subdevice IND2 IND3 IND4 IND5 IND1 IND2 IND3 IND4 IND5 ADC ADC

Info invalid SEA (STC) curve invalid SEA (STC) curve invalid SEA (STC) curve invalid SEA (STC) curve invalid potentiometer curve invalid potentiometer curve invalid potentiometer curve invalid potentiometer curve invalid potentiometer curve interrupt tune interrupt auto SEA (STC) invalid pulse per revolution count invalid transceiver number no antenna rotation no external trigger external trigger exceeds minimum external trigger exceeds maximum magnetron current failure

magnetron fatal error

CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 BITE BITE BITE BITE DPM DPM

Recommended Action

- Check F1 on the Power Supply Unit NG3028G202 - Check the correct functioning of the HV supply switch in the transceiver housing/Gearbox. - Exchange the Pulse Generator NG3028G203 or NG3028G206 - Exchange Magnetron - Exchange TCU NG3028G201 - Exchange Power Supply NG3028G 202 - Exchange Mains Transformer NG3028G007 X-Band or NG3029G007 (S-Band)

no trigger checkword timeout checkword error invalid CAN object number invalid message type send overrun (in progress) send overrun (in queue) unknown error invalid parameter invalid write max value standard: checksum error standard: invalid block count receive buffer insufficient chip: reset hang invalid interrupt standard: lost block short pool empty long pool empty chip: bus off re-initialization error test not available BITE still active BITE inactive test not available select error lower RAM error

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

10 System Faults

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

10.3 System Fault Code List

Error 02413 02414 02420 02500 02501 02502 02503 02504 02505 02506 02507 02508 02509 02510 02511 02512 02513 02514 02515 02516 02517 02518 02519 02520 02521 02522 02523 02524 02525 02526

Device TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM TRM

03010 03011 03012 03013 03014 03020

NAVBUS NAVBUS NAVBUS NAVBUS NAVBUS NAVBUS

03101 03102 03103 03104 03111 03112 03113 03114 03115 03124 03125 03130 03131 03132 03133 03135

SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

Subdevice Info DPM upper RAM error ADC conversion error supply voltage error EEPROM checksum error EEPROM write timeout EEPROM first time initialization (new device) SYSTEM controller watchdog SYSTEM stack overflow SYSTEM stack underflow SYSTEM undefined operation SYSTEM protection fault SYSTEM illegal word access SYSTEM illegal instruction access ADC limit error: +5 V ADC limit error: +28 V ADC limit error: +15 V ADC limit error: -15 V ADC limit error: +24 V CAN0 chip: LEC: stuff error CAN0 chip: LEC: acknowledge error CAN0 chip: LEC: bit 1 error CAN0 chip: LEC: bit 0 error CAN0 chip: LEC: CRC error no video magnetron operation hours limit EEPROM data compare error try high speed antenna without option magnetron heating voltage error magnetron bias current error adjust magnetron currents

Recommended Action

checkword timeout checkword error incompatible version no navigation data from sensor master fast gyro timeout multiple sensor master CPOOL CPOOL CPOOL CPOOL QUEUE QUEUE QUEUE QUEUE QUEUE RAM ROM EEPROM EEPROM EEPROM EEPROM LOG

error (1..3) invalid pool invalid buffer pool empty error (1..4) receive event w/o buffer invalid queue invalid buffer BAB pool empty error error checksum error erase error write hang data error invalid configuration

215

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

10 System Faults

Technical Manual

10.3 System Fault Code List

Error 03136 03137 03138 03139 03140 03141 03142 03143 03150 03151 03152 03153 03154 03155 03156 03157 03158 03159 03160 03161 03162 03163 03164 03165 03166 03167 03168 03169 03170 03171 03172 03173 03211 03212 03213 03214 03215 03216 03221 03222 03223 03224 03225 03226 03231 03232 03233 03234 03235 03236 03241 03242 03243 03244

216

Device SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600

Subdevice LOG LOG POS CONFIG CONFIG WIND DEPTH CONFIG GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO ROT GYRO ROT GYRO ROT GYRO ROT GYRO ROT GYRO GYRO ROT COMPASS COMPASS SIO SIO SIO SIO SIO1 SIO1 SIO1 SIO1 SIO1 SIO1 SIO2 SIO2 SIO2 SIO2 SIO2 SIO2 SIO3 SIO3 SIO3 SIO3 SIO3 SIO3 SIO4 SIO4 SIO4 SIO4

Info VX noise VY noise invalid configuration reset missing data changed double source double source SI to SI error sample start missing RST phase error phase jumping RST oscillating CAN id 16 timeout serial data timeout serial data timeout C.Plath: serial data error C.Plath: serial data error C.Plath: checksum error C.Plath: checksum error NMEA: serial data error NMEA: serial data error Anschuetz: serial data error Anschuetz: serial data error serial data jumping Anschuetz: checksum error Anschuetz: checksum error reference error difference error pool initialization error pool back pool empty buffer insufficient send timeout receive error send error invalid message length checkword timeout data timeout send timeout receive error send error invalid message length checkword timeout data timeout send timeout receive error send error invalid message length checkword timeout data timeout send timeout receive error send error invalid message length

Recommended Action

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

10 System Faults

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

Error 03245 03246 03251 03252 03253 03254 03255 03256 03261 03262 03263 03264 03265 03266 03271 03272 03273 03274 03275 03276 03281 03282 03283 03284 03285 03286 03290 03291 03292 03300 03301 03302 03303 03304 03305 03310 03311 03312 03313 03314 03315 03316 03317 03318 03319 03320 03321 03330 03331 03401 03402 03403 03404 03405

10.3 System Fault Code List

Device SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

Subdevice SIO4 SIO4 SIO5 SIO5 SIO5 SIO5 SIO5 SIO5 SIO6 SIO6 SIO6 SIO6 SIO6 SIO6 SIO7 SIO7 SIO7 SIO7 SIO7 SIO7 SIO8 SIO8 SIO8 SIO8 SIO8 SIO8 MPS MPS MPS CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 SIO1 SIO2 SIO3 SIO4 SIO5

Info checkword timeout data timeout send timeout receive error send error invalid message length checkword timeout data timeout send timeout receive error send error invalid message length checkword timeout data timeout send timeout receive error send error invalid message length checkword timeout data timeout send timeout receive error send error invalid message length checkword timeout data timeout checkword timeout checkword error track checksum error checkword timeout checkword error invalid CAN object number invalid message type send overrun (in progress) send overrun (in queue) unknown error invalid parameter invalid write max value standard: checksum error standard: invalid block count receive buffer insufficient chip: reset hang invalid interrupt standard: lost block short pool empty long pool empty chip: bus off pool back pool empty checksum error checksum error checksum error checksum error checksum error

Recommended Action

217

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

10 System Faults

Technical Manual

10.3 System Fault Code List

218

Error 03406 03407 03408 03410 03411 03412 03413 03498 03500

Device SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600 SI9600

Subdevice SIO6 SIO7 SIO8 DOLOG DOLOG DOLOG DOLOG BITE

Info checksum error checksum error checksum error invalid message length sensor timeout speed timeout depth timeout invalid configuration test not available

03614 03615 03616 03617

AIS AIS AIS AIS

SIR10T SIR10T SIR10T AIS

receive failure send failure SIR10T timeout AIS timeout

03701 03702

GYRO GYRO

03703

GYRO

03704 03705 03706

GYRO GYRO GYRO

03707

GYRO

03708

GYRO

03709 03710 03711 03712 03713 03714 03715 03716 03717 03718 03719 03721 03722 03723 03724 03725 03726 03727 03728 03729 03730 03740

GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO

GYRO

C.Plath: 01 - Failure of gyro power supply C.Plath: 02 - Reset of the controller C.Plath: 03 - Computer is in test mode or dipswitch ’External Synchronisation’ closed C.Plath: 04 - RAM internal error C.Plath: 05 - RAM external error C.Plath: 06 - PROM checksum error C.Plath: 07 - Heading error at 2 deg light barrier C.Plath: 08 - Heading error at 360 deg light barrier C.Plath: 09 - Failure of 2 deg light barrier C.Plath: 10 - Failure of 360 deg light barrier C.Plath: 11 - Watchdog alarm C.Plath: 12 - Heading not synchronized C.Plath: 13 - Reset after Power-Down-Mode C.Plath: 14 - RAM-Power alarm C.Plath: 15 - AD-Failure C.Plath: checksum error C.Plath: sync bit error C.Plath: message size error C.Plath: magnetic compass Anschuetz: second gyro differs Anschuetz: gyro invalid Anschuetz: gyro phase < 45 deg Anschuetz: gyro settling phase Anschuetz: sensor not available Anschuetz: heading jumping Anschuetz: checksum error Anschuetz: high bit error Anschuetz: system error Anschuetz: gyro error heading jump

03801 03802 03803 03804 03805 03806

SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1

RAM ROM CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 EEPROM

error error chip: LEC: frame error buffer error protocol error error

Recommended Action

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

10 System Faults

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

Error 03807 03808 03809 03810 03811 03812 03813 03814 03815 03816 03817 03818 03819 03820 03824 03825 03826 03827 03828 03829 03830 03831 03832 03833 03834 03835 03836 03837 03838 03839 03840 03841 03842 03843 03844 03845 03846 03847 03848 03849 03850 03851 03852 03853 03854 03855 03856 03857 03858 03859 03860 03861 03862 03863

10.3 System Fault Code List

Device SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

Subdevice MC GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO LOG LOG LOG AIS COMM COMM COMM COMM CPOOL CPOOL CPOOL CPOOL QUEUE QUEUE QUEUE QUEUE QUEUE LOG UART1 UART1 UART1 UART1 UART2 UART2 UART2 UART2 UART3 UART3 UART3 UART3 UART4 UART4 UART4 UART4 UART5 UART5 UART5 UART5 UART6 UART6 UART6 UART6 UART7 UART7 UART7 UART7 UART8 UART8

Info system error RST oscillating RST combination error RST step size error reference timeout error input error input VX input error VY input error target overflow checkword timeout checkword error incompatible version invalid message type CPOOL error Pool bad Buffer bad Pool empty Queue error Rx ev w/o buffer Queue bad Buffer bad BAB pool empty Configuration fault Read error Write error Message length ill Data time-out Read error Write error Message length ill Data time-out Read error Write error Message length ill Data time-out Read error Write error Message length ill Data time-out Read error Write error Message length ill Data time-out Read error Write error Message length ill Data time-out Read error Write error Message length ill Data time-out Read error Write error

Recommended Action

219

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

10 System Faults

Technical Manual

10.3 System Fault Code List

220

Error 03864 03865 03866 03867 03868 03869 03870 03871 03872 03873 03874 03875 03876 03877 03878 03879 03880 03881 03882 03883 03884 03885 03886 03887 03888 03889 03890 03891 03892 03893 03894 03895 03896

Device SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1 SI1

Subdevice UART8 UART8 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 UART1 UART2 UART3 UART4 UART5 UART6 UART7 UART8 SI GYRO GYRO

Info Message length ill Data time-out No check Bad check Bad object ID Bad transfer number Send in progress Send in queue Unknown error Bad parameters Bad write maximum Bad checksum Bad block count Receive buffer too small Reset hang Bad interrupt Lost data block Short pool empty Long pool empty Bus error Send bool back Send bool empty Checksum error Checksum error Checksum error Checksum error Checksum error Checksum error Checksum error Checksum error Configuration wrong Serial gyro time out Serial gyro tlgm error

03901 03902 03903 03904 03905 03906 03907 03908 03909 03910 03911 03912 03913 03914 03915 03916 03917 03918 03919 03920

SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2

RAM ROM CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 EEPROM MC GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO LOG LOG LOG AIS COMM COMM COMM COMM

error error chip: LEC: frame error buffer error protocol error error system error RST oscillating RST combination error RST step size error reference timeout error input error input VX input error VY input error target overflow checkword timeout checkword error incompatible version invalid message type

Recommended Action

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

10 System Faults

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

Error 03924 03925 03926 03927 03928 03929 03930 03931 03932 03933 03934 03935 03936 03937 03938 03939 03940 03941 03942 03943 03944 03945 03946 03947 03948 03949 03950 03951 03952 03953 03954 03955 03956 03957 03958 03959 03960 03961 03962 03963 03964 03965 03966 03967 03968 03969 03970 03971 03972 03973 03974 03975 03976 03977

10.3 System Fault Code List

Device SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

Subdevice CPOOL CPOOL CPOOL CPOOL QUEUE QUEUE QUEUE QUEUE QUEUE LOG UART1 UART1 UART1 UART1 UART2 UART2 UART2 UART2 UART3 UART3 UART3 UART3 UART4 UART4 UART4 UART4 UART5 UART5 UART5 UART5 UART6 UART6 UART6 UART6 UART7 UART7 UART7 UART7 UART8 UART8 UART8 UART8 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1

Info CPOOL error Pool bad Buffer bad Pool empty Queue error Rx ev w/o buffer Queue bad Buffer bad BAB pool empty Configuration fault Read error Write error Message length ill Data time-out Read error Write error Message length ill Data time-out Read error Write error Message length ill Data time-out Read error Write error Message length ill Data time-out Read error Write error Message length ill Data time-out Read error Write error Message length ill Data time-out Read error Write error Message length ill Data time-out Read error Write error Message length ill Data time-out No check Bad check Bad object ID Bad transfer number Send in progress Send in queue Unknown error Bad parameters Bad write maximum Bad checksum Bad block count Receive buffer too small

Recommended Action

221

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

10 System Faults

Technical Manual

10.3 System Fault Code List

222

Error 03978 03979 03980 03981 03982 03983 03984 03985 03986 03987 03988 03989 03990 03991 03992 03993 03994 03995 03996

Device SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2 SI2

Subdevice CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 CAN1 UART1 UART2 UART3 UART4 UART5 UART6 UART7 UART8 SI GYRO GYRO

Info Reset hang Bad interrupt Lost data block Short pool empty Long pool empty Bus error Send bool back Send bool empty Checksum error Checksum error Checksum error Checksum error Checksum error Checksum error Checksum error Checksum error Configuration wrong Serial gyro time out Serial gyro tlgm error

04010 04011

RDC1 RDC1

ARPA ARPA

04020

RDC1

ARPA

04021

RDC1

ARPA

04022

RDC1

ARPA

04023

RDC1

ARPA

04100 04101 04102 04103 04104 04105 04106 04107 04108 04109 04110 04111

RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1 RDC1

ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA

azimuth fault video interrupt timeout video offset low, check RDC ARPA threshold adjust video offset high, check RDC ARPA threshold adjust video gain low, check RDC ARPA threshold adjust or too much SEA(STC) video gain high, check RDC ARPA threshold adjust target acquired twice target distance small no sweeps in video memory sweep to sweep angle small unexpected change of sweep to sweep angle time per revolution small PRF out of limits target bearing not in video memory target bearing disappeared in video memory target speed out of limit target size large shutdown received

05011 05012 05014 05015 05100 05124 05125 05130 05131 05132 05133 05134

PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1

COMM COMM COMM COMM SYSTEM RAM ROM RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY

checkword timeout checkword error receive error send error clock error error error 0 switch error 1 switch error 2 switch error 3 switch error 4 switch error

Recommended Action

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

10 System Faults

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

Error 05135 05136 05137 05138 05139 05140 05141 05142 05143 05144 05145 05146 05147 05148 05149 05150 05151 05152 05153 05154 05155 05156 05157 05158 05159 05160 05161 05162 05163 05164 05165 05166 05167 05168 05169 05170 05171 05172 05173 05174 05300 05301 05302 05303 05304 05305 05310 05311 05312 05313 05314 05315 05316 05317

10.3 System Fault Code List

Device PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

Subdevice RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY IND1 IND2 IND3 IND4 IND5 IND1 IND2 IND3 IND4 IND5

CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0

Info 5 switch error 6 switch error 7 switch error 8 switch error 9 switch error 10 switch error 11 switch error 12 switch error 13 switch error 14 switch error 15 switch error 16 switch error 17 switch error 18 switch error 19 switch error 20 switch error 21 switch error 22 switch error 23 switch error 24 switch error 0 i/o error 1 i/o error 2 i/o error 3 i/o error 4 i/o error invalid inter-switch request invalid inter-switch request invalid inter-switch request invalid inter-switch request invalid inter-switch request invalid transmit data invalid transmit data invalid transmit data invalid transmit data invalid transmit data target device overflow unknown i/o device unable to release CAN chip unable to release relay matrix unable to release i/o relay checkword timeout checkword error invalid CAN object number invalid message type send overrun (in progress) send overrun (in queue) unknown error invalid parameter invalid write max value standard: checksum error standard: invalid block count receive buffer insufficient chip: reset hang invalid interrupt

Recommended Action

223

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

10 System Faults

Technical Manual

10.3 System Fault Code List

224

Error 05318 05319 05320 05321 05322 05405 05406 05407 05410

Device PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1 PCI1

Subdevice CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 CAN0 BITE BITE BITE BITE

Info standard: lost block short pool empty long pool empty chip: bus off re-initialization error test not available BITE still active BITE inactive test not available

06001 06002 06005 06006 06007 06101 06102 06103 06104 06111 06112 06113 06114 06115 06124 06125 06127 06128 06129 06130 06131 06132 06133 06134 06139 06140 06141 06142 06143 06150 06180 06181 06199 06201 06211 06212 06213 06214 06215 06216 06217 06219 06220 06221

TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP

DRIVER DRIVER DRIVER DRIVER DRIVER NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV

checkword timeout checkword error cancel timeout BITE timeout no BITE response CPOOL: error (1..3) CPOOL: invalid pool CPOOL: invalid buffer CPOOL: pool empty QUEUE: error (1..4) QUEUE: receive event w/o buffer QUEUE: invalid queue QUEUE: invalid buffer QUEUE: BAB pool empty RAM: error ROM: error CMOS-RAM: error Using default paramter for TP Paramter organization bad Paramter general failure Paramter protect hang Paramter lock hang Paramter programming timeout Paramter verify failed Address overflow Parameter user & system invalid Tp settings invalid Parameter special invalid Parameter tp interface invalid Lost data (CAN curve buffer small) Invalid TP configuration (2*TP1 or 2*TP2) Slave system displays wrong control mode Ghost interrupt from PIC Serial message not send SIO receive error SIO send error SIO invalid message length SIO checkword timeout Lost data: SYN TX buffer small Lost data: TP-SYN buffer small Lost data: SP-SYN buffer small Lost data: CHL-SYN buffer small Track checksum error Track parameter 1 error

Recommended Action

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

Error 06222 06223 06224 06225 06226 06227 06228 06229 06230 06231 06232 06233 06234 06235 06236 06238 06239 06240 06241 06242 06243 06244 06245 06246 06247 06248 06249 06250 06251 06252 06253 06255 06256 06257 06258 06259 06260 06261 06262 06263 06264 06300 06301 06302 06303 06304 06305 06310 06311 06312 06313 06314 06315 06316

10 System Faults 10.3 System Fault Code List

Device TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

Subdevice NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV

Info Recommended Action Track parameter 2 error Track parameter 3 error Track parameter 4 error Track parameter 5 error Track checksum error 1 Track checksum error 2 Track checksum error 3 Track checksum error 4 Track-Data new Track-Data changed Track-Data not complete Equal Waypoints or Turnpoints following WPT synchronisation disturbed New recalculation of navigation Track lat/lon error WPT-request to fast WPT-request to slow NAV-X/Y overflow NAV-Xrel overflow NAV-Yrel overflow NAV-Delta XB overflow NAV-Delta YB overflow NAV-Delta XC overflow NAV-Delta YC overflow Track checksum error Track checksum error 1 Track checksum error 2 FPU not available FPU initialization error FPU domain error FPU result error FPU test 1 error FPU test 2 error FPU test 3 error FPU test 4 error FPU test 5 error Position timeout Course/Speed timeout Date/Time timeout WPT-Track timeout Processing timeout TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 checkword timeout TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 checkword error TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 invalid CAN object number TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 invalid message type TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 send overrun (in progress) TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 send overrun (in queue) TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 unknown error TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 invalid parameter TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 invalid write max value TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 standard: checksum error TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 standard: invalid block count TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 receive buffer insufficient TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 chip: reset hang

225

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

10 System Faults

Technical Manual

10.3 System Fault Code List

226

Error 06317 06318 06319 06320 06321 06400 06401 06402 06403 06404 06405 06410 06411 06412 06413 06414 06415 06416 06417 06418 06419 06420 06421 06480 06481 06501 06502 06503 06504 06505 06506

Device TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP

Subdevice NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV

06507

TP

NAV

06508 06509 06510 06511 06520 06521 06522 06530 06549 06551 06552 06553 06554 06555 06556

TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP

NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV NAV REG REG REG REG REG REG

06557

TP

REG

06558 06559 06560 06561 06580

TP TP TP TP TP

REG REG REG REG REG

Info Recommended Action TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 invalid interrupt TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 standard: lost block TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 short pool empty TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 long pool empty TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 chip: bus off NAV-Bus / CAN-1 checkword timeout NAV-Bus / CAN-1 checkword error NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid CAN object number NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid message type NAV-Bus / CAN-1 send overrun (in progress) NAV-Bus / CAN-1 send overrun (in queue) NAV-Bus / CAN-1 unknown check NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid parameter NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid write max value NAV-Bus / CAN-1 standard: checksum error NAV-Bus / CAN-1 standard: invalid block count NAV-Bus / CAN-1 receive buffer insufficient NAV-Bus / CAN-1 chip: reset hang NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid interrupt NAV-Bus / CAN-1 standard: lost block NAV-Bus / CAN-1 short pool empty NAV-Bus / CAN-1 long pool empty NAV-Bus / CAN-1 chip: bus off CAN send nav pool empty CAN send nav pool back MMCI buffer does not belong to the pool MMCI pool is empty MMCI message queue error MMCI pool size too small during initialization MMCI function address is null MMCI received event without buffer queue MMCI interrupt without legal data in receive area MMCI message queue clear to send timeout MMCI invalid message length received MMCI illegal partition size MMCI lost data during receive TpReg checkword timeout TpReg checkword error TpReg invalid message type TpReg BITE timeout TpReg unknown error code MMCI buffer does not belong to the pool MMCI pool is empty MMCI message queue error MMCI pool size too small during initialization MMCI error function address is null MMCI received event without buffer queue MMCI interrupt without legal data in receive area MMCI message queue clear to send timeout MMCI invalid message length received MMCI illegal partition size MMCI lost data during receive TpNav checkword timeout

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

10 System Faults 10.3 System Fault Code List

Error 06581 06601 06602 06603 06604 06611 06612 06613 06614 06615 06624 06625 06626 06699 06701 06710 06711 06712 06713 06714 06715 06716 06717 06718 06721 06722 06725 06726 06727 06728 06729 06730 06731 06732 06733 06738 06739 06740 06741 06742 06743 06744

Device TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP

Subdevice REG REG REG REG REG REG REG REG REG REG REG REG REG REG REG REG REG REG REG REG REG REG REG REG RC: RC: RC: RC: RC: RC: RC: RC: RC: RC: RC: REG REG REG REG REG REG REG

06745

TP

REG

06746 06747 06748 06749 06750 06800 06801 06802 06803 06804

TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP

REG REG REG REG REG REG REG REG REG REG

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

Info Recommended Action TpNav checkword error CPOOL error (1..3) CPOOL invalid pool CPOOL invalid buffer CPOOL pool empty QUEUE error (1..4) QUEUE receive event w/o buffer QUEUE invalid queue QUEUE invalid buffer QUEUE BAB pool empty RAM error ROM error Missing EEPROM and CMOS data Ghost interrupt Message to IP not send IP receive timeout IP receive error IP send error IP invalid message length received IP checkword timeout IP checkword error IP data not complete IP unknown error code IP control mode not available RC ROM error RC RAM error RC status fault A/D-converter RC error test signal T1 (AN.-OUT 1) RC error test signal T2 (AN.-OUT 2) RC error test signal T3 (+10V) RC error test signal T4 (-10V) RC set rudder overflow RC ser-RX: parity error RC ser-RX: checksum error RC ser-RX: invalid message type serial integr.-control system timeout azimuth thruster interface error Actual rudder not equal Set-rudder Rudder1 not equal Rudder2 Port rudder failure from extern Starboard rudder failure from extern Rudder Rate feedback failure Single rudder feedback not equal backup feedback Invalid data for backup feedback Invalid data for single rudder feedback Invalid data for PRT rudder feedback Invalid data for STB rudder feedback ROT prediction error NAV-Bus / CAN1 checkword timeout NAV-Bus / CAN1 checkword error NAV-Bus / CAN1 invalid CAN object number NAV-Bus / CAN1 invalid message type NAV-Bus / CAN1 send overrun (in progress)

227

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

10 System Faults

Technical Manual

10.3 System Fault Code List

Error 06805 06810 06811 06812 06813 06814 06815 06816 06817 06818 06819 06820 06821 06830 06831 06832 06833 06834 06835 06836 06837 06838 06839 06840 06841 06842 06843 06844 06845 06846 06847 06848 06849 06850 06851 06852 06853 06854 06855 06856 06857 06858 06859 06860 06861 06862 06863 06864 06865 06866 06867 06868 06869 06870

228

Device TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP

Subdevice REG REG REG REG REG REG REG REG REG REG REG REG REG IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP

Info Recommended Action NAV-Bus / CAN1 send overrun (in queue) NAV-Bus / CAN1 unknown error NAV-Bus / CAN1 invalid parameter NAV-Bus / CAN1 invalid write max value NAV-Bus / CAN1 standard: checksum error NAV-Bus / CAN1 standard: invalid block count NAV-Bus / CAN1 receive buffer insufficient NAV-Bus / CAN1 chip: reset hang NAV-Bus / CAN1 invalid interrupt NAV-Bus / CAN1 standard: lost block NAV-Bus / CAN1 short pool empty NAV-Bus / CAN1 long pool empty NAV-Bus / CAN1 chip: bus off unknown error from IP RAM error ROM error Can bus LEC error Can bus buffer error Can bus STN protocol error Can bus off or warning level reserve System error watchdog, ... Error power supply +15V Error power supply -15V Error power supply 24V Error hold voltage TP time out Low current poti 1 reference Low current poti 2 reference Low current poti 3 reference Low current poti 4 reference Rudder rate feedback failure (STB or Single) Rudder rate feedback failure (PRT or Backup) Rudder3 rate feedback failure Rudder4 rate feedback failure Rudder5 rate feedback failure Rudder6 rate feedback failure Rudder7 rate feedback failure Rudder8 rate feedback failure Config of rudder input wrong Config of rudder output wrong Rudder relays failure (STB or Single = K1/K2) Rudder relays failure (PRT or Backup = K3/K4) reserve Relays 1 set error Relays 2 set error Relays 3 set error Relays 4 set error Relays 5 set error Relays 6 set error Relays 7 set error Relays 8 set error Relays 9 set error Relays 10 set error

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

10 System Faults

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

Error 06871 06872 06873 06874 06875 06876 06877 06878 06879 06880 06881 06882 06883 06884 06885 06886 06887 06888 06889 06890 06891 06892 06893 06894 06895 06896 06897 06898 06899 06900 06901 06902 06903 06904 06905 06906 06907 06908 06909 06910 06912 06914 06915 06916 06917 06918 06919 06920 06922 06923 06929 06931 06932 06940

10.3 System Fault Code List

Device TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

Subdevice IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP REG REG REG REG REG REG REG REG REG REG REG REG REG REG IP

Info Relays 11 set error Relays 12 set error SIO pool empty SIO FIFO overrun Uart 0 error while reading byte Uart 0 error while writing byte Uart 0 illegal size for message type Uart 0 data time out while reading Uart 0 checksum error Uart 1 error while reading byte Uart 1 error while writing byte Uart 1 illegal size for message type Uart 1 data time out while reading Uart 1 checksum error Uart 2 error while reading byte Uart 2 error while writing byte Uart 2 illegal size for message type Uart 2 data time out while reading Uart 2 checksum error Uart 3 error while reading byte Uart 3 error while writing byte Uart 3 illegal size for message type Uart 3 data time out while reading Uart 3 checksum error Uart 4 error while reading byte Uart 4 error while writing byte Uart 4 illegal size for message type Uart 4 data time out while reading Uart 4 checksum error Uart 5 error while reading byte Uart 5 error while writing byte Uart 5 illegal size for message type Uart 5 data time out while reading Uart 5 checksum error Fan rotation failure Poti 1 reference short circuit Poti 2 reference short circuit Poti 3 reference short circuit Poti 4 reference short circuit Course integration error Joystick fault Missing position type Missing position status Trackmode-data wrong update Trackmode-data timeout Trackmode: OFF COURSE for NEW TRACK Trackmode: NEW TRACK in curve Trackmode centred Invalid curve sequence Filtered XTD too large Tp gyro fault RPM PRT missing RPM STB missing EEPROM error parameter data

Recommended Action

229

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

10 System Faults

Technical Manual

10.3 System Fault Code List

230

Error 06941 06942 06943 06944 06945 06946 06947 06948 06949 06950 06951 06952 06953

Device TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP

Subdevice IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP

Info EEPROM EEPROM EEPROM EEPROM EEPROM EEPROM EEPROM EEPROM EEPROM EEPROM EEPROM EEPROM EEPROM

Recommended Action

08001 08002 08005 08006 08007 08010 08011 08101 08102 08103 08104 08111 08112 08113 08114 08115 08124 08125 08126 08127 08129 08130 08131 08132 08133 08134 08139 08140 08141 08199 08201 08211 08212 08213 08214 08215 08220 08300 08301 08302

SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP

DRIVER DRIVER DRIVER DRIVER DRIVER EEPROM EEPROM MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1

checkword timeout checkword error cancel timeout BITE timeout no BITE response checksum error: transfer of system parameter checksum error: transfer of user parameter CPOOL: error (1..3) CPOOL: invalid pool CPOOL: invalid buffer CPOOL: pool empty QUEUE: error (1..4) QUEUE: receive event w/o buffer QUEUE: invalid queue QUEUE: invalid buffer QUEUE: BAB pool empty RAM: error ROM: error NCC-Bus / CAN-2 TP-DMC1 timeout CMOS-RAM: error EEPROM organization bad EEPROM general failure EEPROM protect hang EEPROM lock hang EEPROM programming timeout EEPROM verify failed address overflow EEPROM parameter configuration invalid EEPROM user/system configuration invalid ghost interrupt from PIC serial message not send SIO receive error SIO send error SIO invalid message length SIO checkword timeout SIO checkword error speed timeout NCC-Bus / CAN-2 checkword timeout NCC-Bus / CAN-2 checkword error NCC-Bus / CAN-2 invalid CAN object number

error error error error error error error error error error error error error

version data Relais device Hold device Interconnection board A/D device D/A pcb channel 1 D/A pcb channel 2 D/A pcb channel 3 D/A pcb channel 4 D/A pcb channel 5 D/A pcb channel 6 D/A pcb channel 7 D/A pcb channel 8

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

10 System Faults 10.3 System Fault Code List

Error 08303 08304 08305 08310 08311 08312 08313 08314 08315 08316 08317 08318 08319 08320 08321 08400 08401 08402 08403 08404 08405 08410 08411 08412 08413 08414 08415 08416 08417 08418 08419 08420 08421 08480 08481 08501 08502 08503 08504 08505 08506

Device SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP

Subdevice MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1

08507

SP

MC1

08508 08509 08510 08511 08520 08521 08522 08601 08602 08603 08604

SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP

MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

Info Recommended Action NCC-Bus / CAN-2 invalid message type NCC-Bus / CAN-2 send overrun (in progress) NCC-Bus / CAN-2 send overrun (in queue) NCC-Bus / CAN-2 unknown error NCC-Bus / CAN-2 invalid parameter NCC-Bus / CAN-2 invalid write max value NCC-Bus / CAN-2 standard: checksum error NCC-Bus / CAN-2 standard: invalid block count NCC-Bus / CAN-2 receive buffer insufficient NCC-Bus / CAN-2 chip: reset hang NCC-Bus / CAN-2 invalid interrupt NCC-Bus / CAN-2 standard: lost block NCC-Bus / CAN-2 short pool empty NCC-Bus / CAN-2 long pool empty NCC-Bus / CAN-2 chip: bus off NAV-Bus / CAN-1 checkword timeout NAV-Bus / CAN-1 checkword error NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid CAN object number NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid message type NAV-Bus / CAN-1 send overrun (in progress) NAV-Bus / CAN-2 send overrun (in queue) NAV-Bus / CAN-1 unknown error NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid parameter NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid write max value NAV-Bus / CAN-1 standard: checksum error NAV-Bus / CAN-1 standard: invalid block count NAV-Bus / CAN-1 receive buffer insufficient NAV-Bus / CAN-1 chip: reset hang NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid interrupt NAV-Bus / CAN-1 standard: lost block NAV-Bus / CAN-1 short pool empty NAV-Bus / CAN-1 long pool empty NAV-Bus / CAN-1 chip: bus off CAN send nav pool empty CAN send nav pool back MMCI buffer does not belong to the pool MMCI pool is empty MMCI DPM error MMCI pool size too small during initialization MMCI function address is null MMCI received event without buffer queue MMCI interrupt without legal data in receive area MMCI DPM clear to send timeout MMCI invalid message length received MMCI illegal partition size MMCI lost data during receive MC2 checkword timeout MC2 checkword error MC2 invalid message type SI checkword timeout SI checkword error SI invalid broadcast message type SI invalid message type

231

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

10 System Faults

Technical Manual

10.3 System Fault Code List

232

Error 08700 08701 08702 08703 08704 08705 08706 08710 08800 08801 08802 08803 08805 08810 08811 08812 08814 08815 08816

Device SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP

Subdevice MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1 MC1

Info EI1 analog input fault EI1 VDIG voltage fault EI1 VDD_M voltage fault EI1 VEE_M voltage fault EI1 VREF voltage fault EI1 VLM voltage fault EI1 VLP voltage fault EI1 high int. freq. at digtal input EI2 analog input fault EI2 UKOM voltage fault EI2 VDD_M voltage fault EI2 VEE_M voltage fault EI2 temperature input fault EI2 lever output fault EI2 busy relay fault EI2 lever feedback fault EI2 watchdog EI/SP no master SP lost one of two enable signals

09001 09002 09003 09004 09005 09006 09007 09008 09009 09010 09011 09012 09013 09014 09015 09016 09017 09018 09019 09020 09021 09025 09026 09027 09028 09029 09030 09031 09032 09033

RKE1 RKE1 RKE1 RKE1 RKE1 RKE1 RKE1 RKE1 RKE1 RKE1 RKE1 RKE1 RKE1 RKE1 RKE1 RKE1 RKE1 RKE1 RKE1 RKE1 RKE1 RKE1 RKE1 RKE1 RKE1 RKE1 RKE1 RKE1 RKE1 RKE1

RAM ROM CAN_KB CAN_KB CAN_KB EEPROM SYSTEM PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 CAN_KB CAN_KB PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 COM1 COM1 COM1 COM1 COM1

check error check error bus frame error bus buffer error bus protocol error checksum error MC system error( watchdog, .... ) Dev1 startbit error Dev1 paritybit error Dev1 stopbit error Dev1 timeout error Dev2 startbit error Dev2 paritybit error Dev2 stopbit error Dev2 timeout error Dev3 startbit error Dev3 paritybit error Dev3 stopbit error Dev3 timeout error OPERATING UNIT FAILURE no default Slave found Dev4 startbit error Dev4 paritybit error Dev4 stopbit error Dev4 timeout error error while reading byte error while writing byte illegal size for message type data time out while reading uart 1 checksum error

09101 09102 09103

RKE2 RKE2 RKE2

RAM ROM CAN_KB

check error check error bus frame error

Recommended Action

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

10 System Faults

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

10.3 System Fault Code List

Error 09104 09105 09106 09107 09108 09109 09110 09111 09112 09113 09114 09115 09116 09117 09118 09119 09120 09121 09125 09126 09127 09128 09129 09130 09131 09132 09133

Device RKE2 RKE2 RKE2 RKE2 RKE2 RKE2 RKE2 RKE2 RKE2 RKE2 RKE2 RKE2 RKE2 RKE2 RKE2 RKE2 RKE2 RKE2 RKE2 RKE2 RKE2 RKE2 RKE2 RKE2 RKE2 RKE2 RKE2

Subdevice CAN_KB CAN_KB EEPROM SYSTEM PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 CAN_KB CAN_KB PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 COM1 COM1 COM1 COM1 COM1

Info bus buffer error bus protocol error checksum error MC system error( watchdog, .... ) Dev1 startbit error Dev1 paritybit error Dev1 stopbit error Dev1 timeout error Dev2 startbit error Dev2 paritybit error Dev2 stopbit error Dev2 timeout error Dev3 startbit error Dev3 paritybit error Dev3 stopbit error Dev3 timeout error OPERATING UNIT FAILURE no default Slave found Dev4 startbit error Dev4 paritybit error Dev4 stopbit error Dev4 timeout error error while reading byte error while writing byte illegal size for message type data time out while reading uart 1 checksum error

09201 09202 09203 09204 09205 09206 09207 09208 09209 09210 09211 09212 09213 09214 09215 09216 09217 09218 09219 09220 09221 09225 09226 09227 09228 09229

RKE3 RKE3 RKE3 RKE3 RKE3 RKE3 RKE3 RKE3 RKE3 RKE3 RKE3 RKE3 RKE3 RKE3 RKE3 RKE3 RKE3 RKE3 RKE3 RKE3 RKE3 RKE3 RKE3 RKE3 RKE3 RKE3

RAM ROM CAN_KB CAN_KB CAN_KB EEPROM SYSTEM PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 CAN_KB CAN_KB PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 COM1

check error check error bus frame error bus buffer error bus protocol error checksum error MC system error( watchdog, .... ) Dev1 startbit error Dev1 paritybit error Dev1 stopbit error Dev1 timeout error Dev2 startbit error Dev2 paritybit error Dev2 stopbit error Dev2 timeout error Dev3 startbit error Dev3 paritybit error Dev3 stopbit error Dev3 timeout error OPERATING UNIT FAILURE no default Slave found Dev4 startbit error Dev4 paritybit error Dev4 stopbit error Dev4 timeout error error while reading byte

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

Recommended Action

233

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

10 System Faults

Technical Manual

10.3 System Fault Code List

234

Error 09230 09231 09232 09233

Device RKE3 RKE3 RKE3 RKE3

Subdevice COM1 COM1 COM1 COM1

Info error while writing byte illegal size for message type data time out while reading uart 1 checksum error

09301 09302 09303 09304 09305 09306 09307 09308 09309 09310 09311 09312 09313 09314 09315 09316 09317 09318 09319 09320 09321 09325 09326 09327 09328 09329 09330 09331 09332 09333

RKE4 RKE4 RKE4 RKE4 RKE4 RKE4 RKE4 RKE4 RKE4 RKE4 RKE4 RKE4 RKE4 RKE4 RKE4 RKE4 RKE4 RKE4 RKE4 RKE4 RKE4 RKE4 RKE4 RKE4 RKE4 RKE4 RKE4 RKE4 RKE4 RKE4

RAM ROM CAN_KB CAN_KB CAN_KB EEPROM SYSTEM PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 CAN_KB CAN_KB PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 COM1 COM1 COM1 COM1 COM1

check error check error bus frame error bus buffer error bus protocol error checksum error MC system error( watchdog, .... ) Dev1 startbit error Dev1 paritybit error Dev1 stopbit error Dev1 timeout error Dev2 startbit error Dev2 paritybit error Dev2 stopbit error Dev2 timeout error Dev3 startbit error Dev3 paritybit error Dev3 stopbit error Dev3 timeout error OPERATING UNIT FAILURE no default Slave found Dev4 startbit error Dev4 paritybit error Dev4 stopbit error Dev4 timeout error error while reading byte error while writing byte illegal size for message type data time out while reading uart 1 checksum error

09401 09402 09403 09404 09405 09406 09407 09408 09409 09410 09411 09412 09413 09414 09415 09416 09417 09418

RKE5 RKE5 RKE5 RKE5 RKE5 RKE5 RKE5 RKE5 RKE5 RKE5 RKE5 RKE5 RKE5 RKE5 RKE5 RKE5 RKE5 RKE5

RAM ROM CAN_KB CAN_KB CAN_KB EEPROM SYSTEM PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2

check error check error bus frame error bus buffer error bus protocol error checksum error MC system error( watchdog, .... ) Dev1 startbit error Dev1 paritybit error Dev1 stopbit error Dev1 timeout error Dev2 startbit error Dev2 paritybit error Dev2 stopbit error Dev2 timeout error Dev3 startbit error Dev3 paritybit error Dev3 stopbit error

Recommended Action

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

10 System Faults

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

10.3 System Fault Code List

Error 09419 09420 09421 09425 09426 09427 09428 09429 09430 09431 09432 09433

Device RKE5 RKE5 RKE5 RKE5 RKE5 RKE5 RKE5 RKE5 RKE5 RKE5 RKE5 RKE5

Subdevice PS/2 CAN_KB CAN_KB PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 COM1 COM1 COM1 COM1 COM1

Info Dev3 timeout error OPERATING UNIT FAILURE no default Slave found Dev4 startbit error Dev4 paritybit error Dev4 stopbit error Dev4 timeout error error while reading byte error while writing byte illegal size for message type data time out while reading uart 1 checksum error

09501 09502 09503 09504 09505 09506 09507 09508 09509 09510 09511 09512 09513 09514 09515 09516 09517 09518 09519 09520 09521 09525 09526 09527 09528 09529 09530 09531 09532 09533

RKE6 RKE6 RKE6 RKE6 RKE6 RKE6 RKE6 RKE6 RKE6 RKE6 RKE6 RKE6 RKE6 RKE6 RKE6 RKE6 RKE6 RKE6 RKE6 RKE6 RKE6 RKE6 RKE6 RKE6 RKE6 RKE6 RKE6 RKE6 RKE6 RKE6

RAM ROM CAN_KB CAN_KB CAN_KB EEPROM SYSTEM PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 CAN_KB CAN_KB PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 COM1 COM1 COM1 COM1 COM1

check error check error bus frame error bus buffer error bus protocol error checksum error MC system error( watchdog, .... ) Dev1 startbit error Dev1 paritybit error Dev1 stopbit error Dev1 timeout error Dev2 startbit error Dev2 paritybit error Dev2 stopbit error Dev2 timeout error Dev3 startbit error Dev3 paritybit error Dev3 stopbit error Dev3 timeout error OPERATING UNIT FAILURE no default Slave found Dev4 startbit error Dev4 paritybit error Dev4 stopbit error Dev4 timeout error error while reading byte error while writing byte illegal size for message type data time out while reading uart 1 checksum error

09601 09602 09603 09604 09605 09606 09607 09608 09609 09610

RKE7 RKE7 RKE7 RKE7 RKE7 RKE7 RKE7 RKE7 RKE7 RKE7

RAM ROM CAN_KB CAN_KB CAN_KB EEPROM SYSTEM PS/2 PS/2 PS/2

check error check error bus frame error bus buffer error bus protocol error checksum error MC system error( watchdog, .... ) Dev1 startbit error Dev1 paritybit error Dev1 stopbit error

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

Recommended Action

235

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

10 System Faults

Technical Manual

10.3 System Fault Code List

236

Error 09611 09612 09613 09614 09615 09616 09617 09618 09619 09620 09621 09625 09626 09627 09628 09629 09630 09631 09632 09633

Device RKE7 RKE7 RKE7 RKE7 RKE7 RKE7 RKE7 RKE7 RKE7 RKE7 RKE7 RKE7 RKE7 RKE7 RKE7 RKE7 RKE7 RKE7 RKE7 RKE7

Subdevice PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 CAN_KB CAN_KB PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 COM1 COM1 COM1 COM1 COM1

Info Dev1 timeout error Dev2 startbit error Dev2 paritybit error Dev2 stopbit error Dev2 timeout error Dev3 startbit error Dev3 paritybit error Dev3 stopbit error Dev3 timeout error OPERATING UNIT FAILURE no default Slave found Dev4 startbit error Dev4 paritybit error Dev4 stopbit error Dev4 timeout error error while reading byte error while writing byte illegal size for message type data time out while reading uart 1 checksum error

09701 09702 09703 09704 09705 09706 09707 09708 09709 09710 09711 09712 09713 09714 09715 09716 09717 09718 09719 09720 09721 09725 09726 09727 09728 09729 09730 09731 09732 09733

RKE8 RKE8 RKE8 RKE8 RKE8 RKE8 RKE8 RKE8 RKE8 RKE8 RKE8 RKE8 RKE8 RKE8 RKE8 RKE8 RKE8 RKE8 RKE8 RKE8 RKE8 RKE8 RKE8 RKE8 RKE8 RKE8 RKE8 RKE8 RKE8 RKE8

RAM ROM CAN_KB CAN_KB CAN_KB EEPROM SYSTEM PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 CAN_KB CAN_KB PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 COM1 COM1 COM1 COM1 COM1

check error check error bus frame error bus buffer error bus protocol error checksum error MC system error( watchdog, .... ) Dev1 startbit error Dev1 paritybit error Dev1 stopbit error Dev1 timeout error Dev2 startbit error Dev2 paritybit error Dev2 stopbit error Dev2 timeout error Dev3 startbit error Dev3 paritybit error Dev3 stopbit error Dev3 timeout error OPERATING UNIT FAILURE no default Slave found Dev4 startbit error Dev4 paritybit error Dev4 stopbit error Dev4 timeout error error while reading byte error while writing byte illegal size for message type data time out while reading uart 1 checksum error

09801 09802

RKE9 RKE9

RAM ROM

check error check error

Recommended Action

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

10 System Faults

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

10.3 System Fault Code List

Error 09803 09804 09805 09806 09807 09808 09809 09810 09811 09812 09813 09814 09815 09816 09817 09818 09819 09820 09821 09825 09826 09827 09828 09829 09830 09831 09832 09833

Device RKE9 RKE9 RKE9 RKE9 RKE9 RKE9 RKE9 RKE9 RKE9 RKE9 RKE9 RKE9 RKE9 RKE9 RKE9 RKE9 RKE9 RKE9 RKE9 RKE9 RKE9 RKE9 RKE9 RKE9 RKE9 RKE9 RKE9 RKE9

Subdevice CAN_KB CAN_KB CAN_KB EEPROM SYSTEM PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 CAN_KB CAN_KB PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 COM1 COM1 COM1 COM1 COM1

Info bus frame error bus buffer error bus protocol error checksum error MC system error( watchdog, .... ) Dev1 startbit error Dev1 paritybit error Dev1 stopbit error Dev1 timeout error Dev2 startbit error Dev2 paritybit error Dev2 stopbit error Dev2 timeout error Dev3 startbit error Dev3 paritybit error Dev3 stopbit error Dev3 timeout error OPERATING UNIT FAILURE no default Slave found Dev4 startbit error Dev4 paritybit error Dev4 stopbit error Dev4 timeout error error while reading byte error while writing byte illegal size for message type data time out while reading uart 1 checksum error

09901 09902 09903 09904 09905 09906 09907 09908 09909 09910 09911 09912 09913 09914 09915 09916 09917 09918 09919 09920 09921 09925 09926 09927 09928

RKE10 RKE10 RKE10 RKE10 RKE10 RKE10 RKE10 RKE10 RKE10 RKE10 RKE10 RKE10 RKE10 RKE10 RKE10 RKE10 RKE10 RKE10 RKE10 RKE10 RKE10 RKE10 RKE10 RKE10 RKE10

RAM ROM CAN_KB CAN_KB CAN_KB EEPROM SYSTEM PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 CAN_KB CAN_KB PS/2 PS/2 PS/2 PS/2

check error check error bus frame error bus buffer error bus protocol error checksum error MC system error( watchdog, .... ) Dev1 startbit error Dev1 paritybit error Dev1 stopbit error Dev1 timeout error Dev2 startbit error Dev2 paritybit error Dev2 stopbit error Dev2 timeout error Dev3 startbit error Dev3 paritybit error Dev3 stopbit error Dev3 timeout error OPERATING UNIT FAILURE no default Slave found Dev4 startbit error Dev4 paritybit error Dev4 stopbit error Dev4 timeout error

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

Recommended Action

237

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

10 System Faults

Technical Manual

10.3 System Fault Code List

238

Error 09929 09930 09931 09932 09933

Device RKE10 RKE10 RKE10 RKE10 RKE10

10001 10002 10010 10011 10012 10013 10014 10016 10017 10018 10019 10020 10021 10022

VDR VDR VDR VDR VDR VDR VDR VDR VDR VDR VDR VDR VDR VDR

10023

VDR

10024 10025

VDR VDR

Subdevice COM1 COM1 COM1 COM1 COM1

Info error while reading byte error while writing byte illegal size for message type data time out while reading uart 1 checksum error

Recommended Action

offline no picture written, LAN connection lost final recording medium data overflow microphone test failed error during process load process aborted error during picture grabbing main power failure UPS fault audio not found error during 4300 control process load final recording medium bit error final recording medium not connected final recording medium IP control failure receive timeout of NMEA 0183 data (IEC 61162-1/2) on serial interfaces or LAN network error external alarm

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

11 Index of Parameters

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

11

Index of Parameters

A Acceleration 116 ADC Threshold Adjus 141 Add a Label (Number) to the Thruster Display 137 Add a Propeller to the Thruster Display 137 Additional Alarms Setup Menu 118 Additional Information (Transceiver) 126 Administration 115 Administration (Indicators) 120 Advanced Settings (Service) 148 AFT Bridge is active String 118 AIS 115 AIS Channel 131 AIS Lost Target witout Alarm 118 Alarm Relays Activation Delay (Indicators) 120 Allowed to be Sensor Master (Indicators) 121 Analog Gyro System (Sensor Interface) 128 Antenna (Transceiver) 126 Antenna Information (Service) 149 Antenna Motor Frequency (Transceiver) 127 ARCS Database 138 ARCS User Permit Number 135 ARPA 108 ARPA Lost Target without Alarm 118 Availability of additional Displays 136 Azimuth Pulses per Revolution (Transceiver) 127 Azimuth Thruster 1...4 137 Azimuth Thruster Parameters 137 Azimuth Thruster x 137

B BAS Device 1(...3) Identifier (Sensor Interface) 133 Based on Specification (Indicators) 121 Basic Radar 118 Baud Rate (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 123 Baud Rate (Sensor Interface) 131 Beam Width (Transceiver) 126 BIOS Settings 153 Blanking Sector X Start Angle (Transceiver) 126 Blanking Sector X Stop Angle (Transceiver) 126 Bottom Track (BT) Input (Sensor Interface) 129 Bridge Alarm System Device 1(...3) (Sensor Interface) 133 Buzzer 105

C Catalog (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 125 Central Dimming Adjustment 122 Channel (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 123, 124, 125 Channel (Sensor Interface) 131, 132 Channel of this Gyro (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 123, 125 CHARTRADAR Function (Indicators) 121 CHARTRADAR Function License Key (Indicators) 121 CHARTRADAR Identification Code (Indicators) 121 Check IMB Alarm IO 142 Clutch Label 135 C-Map Identifier 135 Collapse 113

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_SIX.fm / 06.09.05

Colored Angle Display Limit 137 Commissioning Data 151 Compress 113 Config Transfer 151 Configure 112 Connected Monitor (Indicators) 120 Connected Planning System 115 Conning 135 Conning (Indicators) 121

D Dangerous Target Alarm (Indicators) 120 Date & Time 102 Default Depth (Startup Sensor Selection) 119 Default Weather (Startup Sensor Selection) 119 Default Wind (Startup Sensor Selection) 119 Depth (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 125 Depth Sensor 1 (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 125 Depth Value 125 Differentiated Heading (Startup Sensor Selection) 119 Diskette 104 Displacement 136 Displacement Table 136 Display Pitch Bar 135 Display Power Bar 135, 136 Display Selected Gyro 123, 125, 131 Distance Longitudinal (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 123, 124 Distance Longitudinal (Sensor Interface) 129, 131, 132 Distance Longitudinal (Transceiver) 126 Distance to Bow (System) 115 Distance to P (System) 116 Distance to SB (System) 115 Distance to Stern (System) 115 Distance Transversal (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 123, 124 Distance Transversal (Sensor Interface) 129, 132 Distance Transversal (Transceiver) 126 Double End Ferry 122 Draught 136 Driver (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 123

E ENC Database 138 ENC User Permit No. 135 ENGINE INTERFACE (SPEEDPILOT) 114 Error Input (Sensor Interface) 128, 129 Expand 113

F Frequency Deviation (Transceiver) 126 Full Sensitivity Gyro against COG above speed of 117 FWD Bridge is active String 118

G Generator Parameters 136 GLL, GGA Selection (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 123

239

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

11 Index of Parameters

Technical Manual

GLL, GGA Selection (Sensor Interface) 132 Guard Zone Alarm (Indicators) 120 Gyro (Sensor Interface) 128 Gyro against COG of Main Position Sensor 116 Gyro against COG of Redundant Position Sensor 116 Gyro against Magnetic Compass 116 Gyro Input Voltage (Sensor Interface) 128 Gyro Monitoring 116

H Heading (Startup Sensor Selection) 118 Heading Sensor Channel (Sensor Interface) 128 Headmarker (Service -> Transceiver) 145 Height above Sea Level 126

I Ignore Gyro against COG above ROT of 117 Ignore Gyro against COG below Speed of 117 IMB Map Storage Test 105 Increment (Sensor Interface) 128, 129 Indicator 114 Indicator (Service) 140 Installed Type of Tracking Facility 120 Interswitch 150 Interswitch (PCI) 114

K Keyboard 105 Keyboard (Indicators) 120

L Last Modification Date (Transceiver) 127 Length at Waterline 116 Local Indicator Number 114 Log Type (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 124 Log Type (Sensor Interface) 129, 132 Longitudinal Speed Filter Constant (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 124 Longitudinal Speed Filter Constant (Sensor Interface) 130, 132 Lost Target Alarm (Indicators) 120

M Magnetron (Service) 148 Magnetron Hours (Service) 149 Map Delete 103 Map Transfer 102 Maximum Radius 116 Maximum ROT Alarm Limit 116 Maximum Thruster Power 137 Maximum Thruster RPM 137 Minimum Radius 116 Monitor Adjust 140 Monitor Aspect Ratio 122 Monitor Control Interface 122

N NACOS 134, 150 NACOS (System Layout) 114

240

Name (Indicators) 120 Nominal Speed 116 Number of Blanking Sectors (Transceiver) 126 Number of Clutches 135 Number of Generators 136 Number of Shafts 135

O Output (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 124, 132

P Planning System 134 PM Adjust (Service -> Transceiver) 147 PMA Display (Service -> Transceiver) 146 Position (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 123 Position (Sensor Interface) 131 Position (Startup Sensor Selection) 118 Position against Redundant Position Sensor 118 Position Monitoring 118 Position Quality Check 116 Pulse Log (Sensor Interface) 128

R Radar 120 Radar PPI Radius 121 Reference (Sensor Interface) 128 RKE Settings 144 RKE Software Update 144 Route (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 125 RSC Test Pictures 106 RTE Message Route Identifier (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 125 RTE Mode (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 125

S Scale Generator Power Bar 136 Scale Longitudinal Speed Bar 135 Scale Off Course Bar 135 Scale Off Track Bar 135 Scale Orientation 137 Scale RPM Bar 135 Scale Rudder Display 135 Scale Shaft Power Bar 136 Sector Blanking (Transceiver) 126 Security Unique Identifier (UID) 135 Select Radar Indicator for CHARTPILOT ARPA targets 134 Selfcheck 105 Sensor Information via Ethernet to CHARTPILOT 134 Sensor Interface 127 Sensor Interface Identifier (Sensor Interface) 129 Sensor Interfaces 114 Sensor Number (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 123 Sensor Number (Sensor Interface) 132 Serial Gyro (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 123 Serial I/O Monitor 142 Serial Output used as 125, 133 Service 139 Service Report 152 Settings for Bridge Alarm System BAS40P (Sensor Interface) 133

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_SIX.fm / 06.09.05

11 Index of Parameters

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

Settings for C. Plath and Anschuetz (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 125 Settings for NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1) (Sensor Interface) 131 Settings for NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1/2) (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 123 Setting-to-Work (Service -> Transceiver) 145 Shaft Parameters 135 Ship Data 115 Ship Data for AIS 115 Software Update 143 Speed (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 124 Speed (Sensor Interface) 132 Speed (Startup Sensor Selection) 118 Speed against Redundant Speed Sensor 117 Speed against SOG of Main Position Sensor 118 Speed against SOG of Redundant Position Sensor 118 Speed Capability (Transceiver) 126 Speed Monitoring 117 Speed Sensor Channel (Sensor Interface) 128 Squat Coefficient 136 Startup Sensor Selection 118 STC Compensation (Service) 149 STC Delay (Service -> Transceiver) 145 System / Ship Parameters 115 System Fault Alarm (Indicators) 120 System Maintenance Manager 100 System Position (System) 115

V VDR 115 Video Anti Clutter Sea 118 Video MBS (Service -> Transceiver) 146 VX Input (Sensor Interface) 130 VY Input (Sensor Interface) 130

W Water Track Input (WT) (Sensor Interface) 130 Weather (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 125 Wind (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 125 Wind Reference (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 124, 133 WPL Remark (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 125

X XPM Input (Sensor Interface) 130

Y YPM Input (Sensor Interface) 130

T TB2 Terminal 15/16 HM Turn 118 Thruster Angle Display Color 137 Thruster Angle Display Mode 137 Time (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 124 Time (Sensor Interface) 132 Time (Startup Sensor Selection) 118 Time from Selected Position Sensor (Startup Sensor Selection) 119 Tools 102 Track Transfer 104 TRACKPILOT 114 TRACKPILOT Track Mode (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 125 Transceiver 114 Transceiver (Service) 145 Transfer of ARPA Alarms to CHARTPILOT 122 Transversal Speed Filter Constant (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 124 Transversal Speed Filter Constant (Sensor Interface) 130, 132 Trigger Delay (Service -> Transceiver) 145 Tuning Indication Gain 149 Tuning Offset (Service) 149 Type of AIS 131 Type of Generation (Transceiver) 126

U Use Speed from Position Sensor (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 123 Use Speed from Position Sensor (Sensor Interface) 132 Use Time from Position Sensor (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 124 Use Time from Position Sensor (Sensor Interface) 132

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_SIX.fm / 06.09.05

241

11 Index of Parameters

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

242

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_SIX.fm / 06.09.05

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

12 Cabling Documents

Technical Manual

12

Cabling Documents

Title

Page

Cable Diagram, General Remarks, 1/6

245

Ca ble Dia gram, Ind ex , 2/6

246

C a bl e D i a gram , Si n gl e R ada r, 3/ 6

247

C a bl e D i a gram , D u al R a dar, 4 / 6

248

C a bl e D i a gram , M ul t i pl e R ad ar, 5 /6

249

Cable Diagram, Console Internal, 6/6

250

Connection Diagram, Remarks, 1/8

251

Connection Diagram, Index, 2/8

252

Connection Diagram, Display Connection, 3/8

253

Connection Diagram, Standard Interfaces, 4/8

254

C o nne ct i on D i agra m, opt i on al C O M Exp and er, 5 /8

255

Connection Diagram, optional Analog Interface, 6/8

256

C o n n e c t i o n D i a g r a m , Tr a n s c e i v e r u p ( Ve r s i o n A ) , 7 / 8

257

C o n n e c t i o n D i a g r a m , Tr a n s c e i v e r d o w n ( Ve r s i o n B ) , 8 / 8

258

X - B a n d , I n t e r c o n n e c t i o n Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A a n d B , 1 / 1

259

X - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , 1 / 4

260

X - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , c o m b i n e d H M a n d A z i m u t h P u l s e r , 1 a / 4

261

X - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n B , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , 2 / 4

262

X - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n B , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , c o m b i n e d H M a n d A z i m u t h P u l s e r , 2 a / 4

263

X - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A a n d B , M o t o r a n d H e a t i n g c a b l i n g , 3 / 4

264

X - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A a n d B , 1 1 5 V Tr a n s f o r m e r , 4 / 4

265

X - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n B , c a b l i n g o f I n t e r c o n n e c t i o n B o a r d , b u l k h e a d h o u s i n g , 1 / 1

266

S - B a n d , I n t e r c o n n e c t i o n Tr a n s c e i v e r , Ve r s i o n A a n d B , 1 / 1

267

S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A w i t h S t a r t U n i t 2 , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , 1 / 7

268

S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n B w i t h S t a r t U n i t 2 , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , 2 / 7

269

S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A a n d B , M o t o r a n d S t a r t U n i t 2 c a b l i n g , 3 / 7

270

S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A a n d B w i t h S t a r t U n i t 1 , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , 4 / 7

271

S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n B w i t h S t a r t U n i t 1 , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , 5 / 7

272

S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A a n d B , M o t o r , H e a t i n g a n d S t a r t U n i t 1 c a b l i n g , 6 / 7

273

S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A a n d B , 1 1 5 V Tr a n s f o r m e r c a b l i n g , 7 / 7

274

S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n B , C o n n e c t i o n B o a r d i n b u l k h e a d h o u s i n g , 1 / 1

275

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05

243

12 Cabling Documents

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Technical Manual

Grounding All components of the radar system have contacts such as bolts or terminals for grounding. Grounding is important for EMC purposes as well as for protecting people’s lives. Both purposes are covered by the standard grounding of the system’s housings to the ship’s metallic structure (bolted or welded). Regardless of the type of ship’s grounding (e.g. star pattern or ground plane pattern), no potential difference should be measurable between two different ground connectors. Potential differences cause compensation currents on the cable shields. If the ship has no metallic structure, all conductively connected metallic parts form an artificial ground. All ground connections should be as short as possible. If possible, different units should be connected to individual ground connectors. Whenever possible, metallic housings should be screwed or welded directly to the ship’s metallic structure. If a safe grounding contact cannot be ensured, additional conductors are necessary. Furthermore, all ground connections should have a low RF-impedance, and should be resistant against vibration and corrosion. Grounding conductors on an open-air deck must be made of corrosion-protected steel, and inside the ship they must be made of copper. The grounding should be done in such a way that the connection can be inspected in a convenient manner. EMC Purposes The shields of all cables must be connected at both ends if no other instructions are given. CAUTION The screen of the coax cables must be connected to the cable glands or cable entries of the housings AND to the appropriate terminals. If the screen is connected to the terminals only, the signals might be disturbed. See Figure 3-2 on page 29. Protective Ground All removable metallic parts of the housings are grounded by means of separate, flexible cables to the main structure of the housing. It is important to connect this ground-cable after parts have been dismounted or exchanged.

244

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

Fig. 12-1





&DEOHQR

(TXLSPHQWGHVFULSWLRQ

Cable Diagram, General Remarks, 1/6

245 6$0B(B063

'$7(

1$0( 

.13 .QcSSHO

352& &+(&. 67'5'



'$7(



25,*,1 

5(3/)25

6$0(OHFWURQLFV

 -XQFWLRQ%R[VXSSOLHGE\VKLS\DUG

FDEOHFRQGXLWRUODLGRQVHSDUDWHWUD\

 &DEOHVWREHLQVWDOOHGE\WKHVKLS\DUGLQPHWDOOLF

FDEOHFRQGXLWDFFLQVWDOODWLRQGZJ

 &DEOHVWREHLQVWDOOHGE\WKHVKLS\DUGLQPHWDOOLF

 6XSSOLHGE\VKLS\DUG

 RQVSHFLDOUHTXHVWRQO\

 7REHODLGRQO\LILQWHUIDFHLVFRQQHFWHG



5(3/:,7+

OHYHOPRUDOWHUQDWLYHO\ODLGLQGLYLGXDOO\LQ,URQSLSH

 0LQLPXPGLVWDQFHWRFDEOHVZLWKKLJKLQWHUIHUHQFH

 6XSSOLHGE\6$0(OHFWURQLFV





&$%/(',$*5$0

5$'$5